Home

WORKABOUT PRO3 Hand-Held Computer with

1. Item Description Specification Unit Remark 1 Over charge detection 4 325 V Typical voltage VCU 2 Over charge hysteresis 0 25 V Typical voltage VHC 3 Over discharge detection 2 5 V Typical voltage VDL 4 Over discharge hysteresis 0 4 V Typical voltage VHD 5 Over current detection 3 125 A Typical 6 Over charge detection delay 1 2 s Typical time 7 Over discharge detection 144 Ms Typical delay time 8 Over current detection delay 9 Ms Typical time 9 Load short circuiting detec 320 Us Typical tion delay time 234 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 7 3 3 3 Safety Data Chapter 7 Specifications Scanner Imager Model Numbers Item Condition Standard Short Circuit Test After a standard charge Protection circuit board to operate short terminals and discharge No explosion fire smoke or leakage for 1 hr Over Charging Test After a standard charge Protection circuit board to operate charge continuously at 4 2V No explosion fire smoke or leakage and 2A for 8 hrs Reverse Charging After a standard discharge Protection circuit board to operate Test reverse charge continuously No explosion fire smoke or leakage at 4 2V and 2A for 8hrs Scanner Imager Model Numbers Scanner Imager Engine Kit Model No Form Factor 1D Laser SE955 WA9102 G1 End Cap without GSM WA9112 G1 End Cap with GSM WA9002 G1 Pod 1D Laser SE1223HP WA9000 G1 Po
2. The Call List command manages your call history listing calls you ve Dialed Received and Missed When you choose one of these commands a dialog box lists the phone number s A drop down menu provides a list of commands you can execute on a phone number in the Call List You can choose to Dial the number Send a New SMS or WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 33 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Voice Menu e Add to phonebook to add the highlighted phone number to your phonebook Refer to Phonebook on page 36 for details additional details about the Phonebook In the Call List Highlight the phone number with which you want to work e Choose a command in the drop down menu Tap on the Execute button to carry out the command Services Call Forwarding OK 7 Forward all calls Call Forwarding B Forward call only if C No Answer y After s Ly Seconds E Unavailable y _ Busy y 1 2 2 59 Aen 5ra Guo 4m Tees Br 9m ED J0 _ 49 251 07 The Service menu offers a Call Forwarding option for your hand held If you choose this option it may take a number of seconds for your unit to read the network settings To forward all calls Tap in the checkbox next to Forward all calls and then type the phone number to which all incoming phone calls will be routed To specify when a call will be forward
3. e 150 Sel 6 4 Case Rules A ss dia o Sok e a ce 152 5 16 5 Ports Tab a os ie eta Re ae Pe es ees BA es 153 5 16 5 1 Tether Port A device COM21 o oo 154 5 16 5 2 Port Replicator Ports A BAndC 156 S17 Totali Recall sonic now tee e 6th oe a GME BER eel 158 5 17 1 Creating a Backup Profile o o oo oo 158 5 17 2 Restoring a Profile scs 4 ri a AA iea 161 5 17 3 Viewing a Profile o ee 162 5174 Deleting a Profile it ta led we poh weed 163 5 18 Tweak T Settngs us mi er hohe deeb i ene eee wad a ele bale and 163 DAS TAA Vance nt RR wh eda oe ag e Bee AT 163 5 18 1 1 CE Services Settings 2 2 eee ee ee 163 5 18 1 2 Interface and Network Settings 0 164 5 18 1 3 Services Settings 2 ee ee ee 165 5 18 1 4 Radio Features 2 ee eee 165 EAN wt 3 oie E ee ch a id See Pele hie ae a a E 166 5 18 2 1 Internet Explorer Settings o o 166 5 18 2 2 User Display Settings 167 5 18 2 3 User System Settings 168 318 3 Registry Editor oer ts o Gk eee ar 168 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 85 5 1 5 2 5 3 Chapter 5 Configuration Remote Connect Remote Connect Remote Connect is a WORKABOUT PRO application used to connect to a Windows Ter minal Server so that you can run a session on the Server machine using the WORKABOUT PRO Windows
4. Main Profil Status l Diags Global gt g TA COMMUNICAT Active Profile pefaut y Status Radio Type Reg Domain Auto Profile Driver Tap on the Profile tab Figure 2 5 SCU Profile Tab Oo O off Down List SCU v2 01 12 Summit Client Utility Main Profile Status Diags Global Edit a Profile Defauit E spc Radio Client Name Power Save Tx Power Encryption None e m EAP Type None WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit Tap on the New button to define a new profile Type a unique name for your configuration using any alpha numeric combination to uniquely identify this profile Tap on OK to return to the Profile tab Tap on Commit to save your SSID setting e When a pop up message indicates that your configuration will be saved tap on OK WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 2 5 3 1 2 5 3 2 2 5 3 3 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN SSID To configure the SSID for the network to which you want to associate Type an SSID in the text box to the right of SSID This field is limited to 32 characters Tap on Commit and then in the pop up message tap on OK to save your SSID setting Important To learn more about the other options available in the radio attributes list refer to Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU under Profile Tab o
5. 5 5 6 2 Calibration Touchscreens rarely require recalibration However if your touchscreen has never been cal ibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item follow the directions below 116 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 5 6 3 5 6 Chapter 5 Configuration Bluetooth Setup e Choose the Calibration tab and then tap on the Recalibrate button Stylus Properties lok x Double Tap Calibration Touch responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start the recalibration process tap Recalibrate a Tf your device isn t B05 OSM Wer Z e Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the screen Touch This tab allows you to disable the touchscreen e Choose the Touch tab Tap the checkbox next to Disable the touch panel Bluetooth Setup Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks PAN The technology is based on a short range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2 4 GHz When two Bluetooth equipped devices come within range of each other they can establish a connection Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio based link it does not require a line of sight connection in order to communicate En Note The Bluetooth radio uses an internal antenna The Bluetooth radio is disabled by default Before you begin the setu
6. PIN Signal Name 1 Ground 2 USB Data Plus can be configured as Host or Device 3 USB Data Minus can be configured as Host or Device 4 USB VBUS can provide 5V 100mA Max for powering USB Devices 5 RS232 Tx data 6 RS232 Rx Data 7 Tether detect resistor ID Determines what kind of device is attached to the Tether port 8 DC Power In 9 DC Power In 10 DC Power In 11 RS232 CTS 12 RS232 RTS 13 RS232 DSR 14 RS232 DTR 15 RS232 DCD 16 RS232 RI 17 Ground 18 Ground 19 Ground 20 Ground A 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix A Port Pinouts Battery Contact Pinout WA3006 amp WA3010 A 3 Battery Contact Pinout WA3006 amp WA3010 PIN Signal Function Name 1 P Power Pin for Battery Pack Negative 2 DQ Maxim DS2762 Data 3 TH GND Ground 4 P Power Pin for Battery Pack Positive 5 PS Power Switch Sensor z Plastic Rip 6 P Power Pin for Battery Pack Negative A 4 Positive Female Battery Connector Pin 1 HAHEI Plastic Rip Pin 6 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual A 3 APPENDIX B WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK WWAN B 1 B 1 1 Wireless WAN Psion Teklogix offers a quad band GPRS radio Model Number RA3030 G2 a WORKABOUT PRO equipped with a GSM GPRS radio has wide area network ing capabilities With this radio and a SIM card you can wirelessly transfer data and you use
7. Tap on the Execute button to save the phone number in your Phonebook Store in SIM to save the phone number there or leave this checkbox blank if you prefer not to store the number on the SIM card WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 2 12 2 12 1 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Resetting the Hand Held Phonebook entries are saved even after you exit Wireless WAN Once you ve added a phone number to the Phonebook a list of new commands is available in the drop down menu Phonebook x 7175551212 2 CET EHE You can choose one of the following e New Entry to add another phone number e New SMS Short Message Service to send a new SMS e Edit Entry to change an existing name and or phone number or Delete Entry to erase an existing phone entry In the Phonebook Highlight the entry with which you want to work e Choose a command from the drop down menu and tap on Execute to carry out the command Resetting the Hand Held Performing a Warm Reset When you perform a warm reset the operating system restarts without clearing the object store memory where the file system resides Registry settings installed programs and any data files are preserved Any open applications are closed and any unsaved data are lost To execute a warm reset e Press and hold down the FN BLUE key and the ENTER key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 37
8. button to the right of the Profile Location field Navigate to the new location and tap on OK to save it Tap on the gt Next button WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 159 Chapter 5 Configuration Creating a Backup Profile Defining the Type of Backup Total Recall Select the type of backup that you wish to perform Default Backup Advanced Backup All files Registry and default Databases will be archived Create Profile DDU Default Backup Default Backup is selected so that all installed or copied files database entries and the Reg istry are saved Choose Advanced Backup if you want to tailor your backup Advanced Backup Choosing Advanced Backup allows you to define what you would like to include in your backup profile Total Recall You may edit the list of files and databases for backup Tap in the checkbox next to the option s listed here to tailor how what you want included in the backup Creating a Profile Once you ve defined the type of profile you want to create 160 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Restoring a Profile Tap on the Create Profile button The options you chose to back up appear in your window as the backup progresses When the backup is complete the last item in the list indicates the location and name of the backup profile Total Recall Finished Creating profile at Hlash Disk Ba
9. Network Access The hand held unit automatically detects insertion into the desktop dock and loads the ap propriate drivers to communicate with the USB Ethernet converters Network Addressing The host application uses standard TCP IP protocol to name locate and communicate with a specific WORKABOUT PRO on the network WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 191 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Troubleshooting the Docking Station Operations 6 14 6 15 192 If a link is established between a WORKABOUT PRO and a host the application on the host and on the hand held must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the WORK ABOUT PRO is removed from the dock interrupting the link Troubleshooting the Docking Station Operations The indicators applications and drivers required to use and monitor the desktop docking station as a dock as opposed to a charger are installed on the WORKABOUT PRO no applications are present on the docking station itself AC Wall Adaptor Model PS1050 G1 The AC wall adaptor available for your WORKABOUT PRO allows you to operate your hand held using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit Adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following countries are shipped with the AC wall adap tor United Kingdom Australia Europe and North America Universal AC Power Supply Adaptor Plugs DC Power Plug e Choose the adaptor plug
10. UPC E Preamble D UPC E1 Check Digit D UPC E1 Preamble D 1D internal 206 2D UPC Half Block Stitching D 3 Scanning Mode 2D D 5 Scan Result 49 Scan Result Time 749 screen stylus using to navigate 65 touch pen using 65 Windows CE navigating 65 SCU Summit Client Utility 24 C 1 configuring 27 Diags Diagnostics Tab C 7 EAP Credentials C 5 Index EAP Types C 4 C 5 Global Settings Tab C 8 IP assigning 24 Main Tab 27 C Profile Tab C 2 security C 4 Status Tab C 7 ThirdPartyConfig C 6 Windows Zero Config WZC C 6 WLAN connecting to 24 SD MMC Card inserting 59 secure battery cover 182 Security Level D 3 Security Level TLC 39 D 57 security level icon 55 Security Settings 73 changing password 74 configuring taskbar 74 level 73 Supervisor 73 Teklogix 73 User 73 Sequence Tab Keyboard Properties 99 Services 34 Set Length L1 D 7 Set Length L2 D 7 Settings Control Panel 78 Network and Dial up connections 78 Run 78 Taskbar and Start Menu 78 SE 955 scanner specs 236 Shared network authentication 18 SHIFT Key 46 Shutdown Suspend 80 suspend and standby 13 Warm Reset 80 Shutdown Start Menu 80 signal quality 802 11 54 SIM card inserting 59 single battery charger WA3001 194 SIP Soft Input Panel 89 Sled See vehicle cradle 200 SMS Configuration B 16 Soft Input Panel SIP 89 Soft Scan Timeout 49 SPACE Key 46 specifications WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual IX x In
11. e To display Control Panel applets in menu form rather than in a window tap in the checkbox next to Expand Control Panel Taskbar Security Tab Taskbar and Start Menu ok x General Advanced Security Application from at menu jot key m If you check Disable hot keys the Application from Start menu hot key field becomes en abled Use this field to enter the name of the application you want to run when the user presses the Menu hot key FN BLUE 0 If you have disabled hot keys hidden the Start Menu and have no application configured the Menu hot key brings up the Security dialog box to allow authorized users to access the terminal configuration Keep in mind that this dialog box is also displayed if an invalid ap plication is entered in the Application from Start Menu hot key field 4 4 The Start Menu N Note Some of the Start Menu items may be disabled based on the current WORKABOUT PRO security settings The Start menu lists the operations you can access and work with It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 71 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 The Start Menu To display the menu Tap on the Start Menu button and then tap on the menu item with which you want to work p an 2 My Device My Documents y xX d Recycle Bin Remote Desktop SM LEEA If you re using a keyboar
12. Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 41 Postal Royal Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Royal Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 41 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Decoded D 4 D 4 1 D 4 2 Decoded E Options E Advanced Options Code 39 Code 128 E EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A E UPC E E UPC EAN Shared Settings ir ly To change a setting press space or double click RRE FEN Tap on the Scanner drop down menu and choose Decoded Intermec ISCP Options Decoded Scanner Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 1 and 10 seconds Advanced Options Decoded Scanner Continuous Scan Mode Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off once the scanner trigger or button is r
13. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS This manual contains important safety and operat ing instructions for battery charger s Before using the battery charger read all instructions and cautionary markings on 1 battery charger 2 battery and 3 product using battery The mains power cord shall comply with national safety regulations of the country where the equipment is to be sold Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by the battery charger manufacturer may result in fire electric shock or personal injury To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the charger pull the plug rather than the cord Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on tripped over or otherwise subjected to damage or stress Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug Replace immediately Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow been dropped or otherwise damaged in any way it should be inspected by qualified service personnel WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 6 10 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Desktop Docking Station Do not disassemble the charger it should be repaired by qualified service personnel Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire e To reduce risk of electric shock unplug the charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning e An extension cord should not be used unless
14. oooooococcnccccccncccncocononcococononos 61 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Contents Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 Navigating in Windows CE 5 0 0ooooccooccccocccccnnncnnrrrrnrrr nr rr 65 4 1 1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus 00 cece cence eee e eens 65 4 1 2 Navigating Using the Keyboard 00 cece cece eee e eee eee eeeeeeenes 65 Working with Files Folders and Programs 00 ee cece ee ee eee sureres serere 66 Phe startup DeskKtoP cocoa ta GEES GEE DE SENG AAA RS ASAAS ASS 67 431 The Desktop Icons O 68 43 2 A EEE NO 69 The Start Menu sessin EE EA na 71 44 1 The Desktop Eeen soe EEKE SEEE EEY 73 AAD Securty Seti GS ss esseere taranna onn TE RERE ETETE EAN E ERA 73 AA 3 RARE RNA 75 A REA Te AAS O chee ee ch pe geeenias abt onee eee ee eS 78 AAG RUMANA A RR 79 AAT ASMA A E DEE a eee dee es 80 Using a Dialog Boxy o A 81 Chapter 5 Configuration 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 Remote Comet A eo 87 The TekTerm Application 000 cece cence eee e eee e eee en ee een rr 87 The Control Pane tant ar IEEE AE ORAR cia 87 Control Panel Icons 20 daa ando eat dea c 88 Basic SUP a A ii ltd 92 S Sek YN e och TTE 92 5302 Display Properties xsecesccs cece ceca ee eee oe Suk GAGA SRE REE EEE STEN OY 95 5 523 Keyboard Properties 022 2 i c c nsesccuguecenneees sa se5 5040 te e eae ee e 97 5 5 4 Volu
15. 20 C for 8 hrs 25 C and 65 humidity for 4 hrs Following that perform a fast dis charge standard charge and then a fast discharge Measure the time taken for the second discharge 100 minutes or more Dry heat After standard charge keep the battery at 60 C for 8 hrs Carry out a fast discharge standard charge and then a fast discharge Measure the 100 minutes or more time taken for the second discharge EMC CE Testing The battery will need to pass the requirements of the EMC directive 89 336 EEC and amendments when fitted into the product Emissions to EN55022 Class B 1998 Immunity to EN55024 1998 Test to be performed by manufacturer Electro Static Discharge Test EN61000 4 8 A Contact Discharge 8kV for each contact pad by 10 times B Air Discharge 15kV for 10 times the discharge test point is for around battery casing No damage 230 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 7 3 2 3 Safety Data Chapter 7 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 Description Condition Standard Short Circuit Test After a standard charge Protection circuit board to operate short terminals and dis No explosion fire smoke or leakage charge for 1 hr Over Charging Test After a standard charge Protection circuit board to operate charge continuously at No explosion fire smoke or leakage 4 2V and 4A for 8 hrs Reverse Charging Test
16. After a standard discharge Protection circuit board to operate reverse charge continu No explosion fire smoke or leakage ously at 4 2V and 4A for 8hrs 7 3 2 4 Safety License Item Licenses Standard 1 UL 1642 The lithium ion cell has been listed and pass the UL1642 stand ard by UL Lab File No MH12383 2 UL 2054 The battery pack is in the process to apply the UL 2054 battery standard File No MH29921 3 89 336 EEC The battery pack is in the process to apply the below standard EMC directive EN55022 LVD 72 23 EEC EN55024 EN61326 4 RoHS Direc The materials of battery pack are used in accordance with the tive European RoHS directive WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 231 Chapter 7 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 7 3 2 5 Environmental Test 232 Description Test Refer Test Reference Results ence Drop mechanical Drop sample battery on all faces from height of 1 2 meters onto concrete floor No explosion fire vent leakage and the open circuit voltage higher than 3 7V Storage at high temp EN60068 2 2 60 C dry for 240 hours Test No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage at low temp EN60068 2 1 20 C dry for 240 hours Test No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage at high temp IEC68 2 3 40 C at 90 RH for 240 hours and high humidity Test No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage temp cycling TEC68 2 14 60 C 2C for 1 hour T1 200C 2C f
17. Attaching the Hand Strap The hand strap can be attached to the back of the WORKABOUT PRO to provide a secure means for operators to carry the hand held The hand strap is attached to the back of unit using two Phillips head screws provided with this accessory WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 173 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Attaching the Hand Strap e Use a Phillips screwdriver to attach the strap to the two threaded inserts on the back of the WORKABOUT PRO near the top of the unit 9 Stretch the hand strap toward the base of the WORKABOUT PRO and hook the bottom of the strap into the slot near the base of the battery pack A tethered stylus and optional external stylus tube can be attached to the hand strap as illustrated below Tethered Stylus 174 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Attaching the Pistol Grip 6 3 Attaching the Pistol Grip There are a number of pistol grips available to you depending on the type of scanner imager installed in your hand held Refer to Table 6 1 on page 173 for a list of pistol grip model numbers and the scanners imagers with which they are compatible En Note The few steps required to attach the pistol grip to the WORKABOUT PRO are com mon to all types of pistol grips However if you plan to use the Flush Mount Pistol Grip WA6103 you ll
18. Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Security Settings Inthe Password field type the Supervisor level password The default password is 123456 Tap on OK You can now access all menu items in the Start Menu along with the icons in the taskbar Changing A Password IM Note Keep in mind that this is the same password as that assigned through the Password control panel applet Refer to Control Panel Icons on page 88 C To assign a password e Choose a security level and enter the existing password in the Password field Tap on the Set Password button A dialog box labelled Password Properties is displayed Type the new password in the Password text box all keyboard characters are valid Inthe Confirm Password text box retype the new password Configuring Security Choosing the Configure button displays the Configure Security dialog box og x Configure Security Show Icons For Supervisor User 7 Allow Teklogix Security Level This dialog box allows you to determine which security levels will have an associated icon displayed in the taskbar By default a security icon is not displayed for user level security l MN Note It is recommended that you enable Allow Teklogix Security Level so that autho OS rized Psion Teklogix service personnel can access your unit should it require maintenance 74 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter
19. Error a Reporting display upload successes and failures and determine file system usage size Input Panel 5 Provides the framework for a Soft Input Panel SIP should you need to design your own Input Panel SIP or change some soft keyboard options Internet Options Provides options to configure your Internet browser You can determine items such as the Internet default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet the cache Options size the Internet connection options and the security level that is applied when browsing IPv6 Support pyg Refers to a new Internet Protocol specification version 6 that has been published to use Support 128 bit IP addresses replacing version 4 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 89 Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons Keyboard 9 Manage Triggers w Network and Dial u Password PC Connection Power Keyboard Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity Manage Triggers Allows multiple scanner trigger management including the ability to configure each of the trigger buttons You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single and double click and the double click time Network And Dial up Connections Displays a network window from which the WORKABOUT PRO
20. Show popup message is enabled default the key sequence required to unlock the keyboard is displayed on the screen as soon as any key is pressed The operator will need to enter that sequence to unlock the keyboard for use WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 107 Chapter 5 Configuration Volume And Sound Properties A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the taskbar when the keyboard is locked a q 2 pa ra App Launch Bluetooth Certificates Keys Devices SY b gt COM Port Date Time Dialing Manager a QU 3 Display Error Input Panel Reporting D gt Internet IPv6 Keyboard Optign Support iy Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard The icon disappears from the taskbar when the keyboard is unlocked 5 5 4 Volume And Sound Properties Inthe Control Panel choose the Volume amp Sounds icon JO Volume amp Sounds 108 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Volume And Sound Properties 5 5 4 1 Volume Adjustments Volume amp Sounds Properties ok x Volume Sounds Microphone F LA aa oda Soft Enable sounds for Events warnings beeps and syster Applications Notifications alarms reminders Key clicks Osoft Loud Screen taps O soft Loud Slide the volume button to the left to lower the beeper volume or to the right to increase the beeper volume Under the heading Enable soun
21. The battery covers vary to accommodate the type of battery installed and the type of WORKABOUT PRO you are using ie be To ar 7527C G2 High Capacity Model No WA3006 PN 1050922 Super High Capacity Model No PN 1050924 WA3010 7527S G2 High Capacity Model No WA3006 PN 1050923 Super High Capacity Model No WA3010 PN 1050925 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 6 8 6 9 A 6 9 1 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Adaptor Cable Options Adaptor Cable Options The following are adaptors can be ordered for your WORKABOUT PRO Model No Adaptor Cable Description WA 1002 Tether to USB device This cable is used to connect USB devices such as USB Flash memory devices WA4020 G2 Tether to RS232 This is a full RS232 port on COM2 WA4001 G2 Tether to USB Client For ActiveSync WA4010 Gl USB to Ethernet adaptor WA4015 USB RS232 adaptor This cable is used with docking station WA4003 G2 Chargers and Docking Stations Important Keep in mind when ordering a charger or docking station you must also order the appropriate power cord separately Psion Teklogix offers a variety of chargers and docking stations for the WORKABOUT PRO These include e e e AC Adaptor Model No PS1050 G1 Cigarette Lighter Adaptor Model No WA3113 G2 Single Battery Charger Model No WA3001 G1 Quad Battery Charger Model No WA3004 G1
22. rity options SSID Auth Type EAP Type and Encryption The SCU settings for ThirdPartyConfig include Client Name Power Save Tx Power Bit Rate and Radio Mode These SCU settings along with SCU global settings and the WZC settings will be applied to the radio module C 6 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU Status Tab C 4 Status Tab Summit Client Utility 2 ok x Main Profile Status Diags Global Profile Default Status Down Device Name Unnamed E yee MAC iii AP Name Unknown i MAC teniente Beacon Period DTIM Connection Channel Bit Rate Mbps Tx Power mw Signal Strength dem J Signal Quality 2 Mim gt spc The Status tab provides status information including IP address and MAC address for the client radio IP address and MAC address for the AP signal strength channel transmit power and data rate C 5 Diag Tab AES 7 AOKI x Main Profile Status Diags Global Profile Default a IP Address Re connect Release Renew Start Ping spc Ping Address Diagnostics Save To Diagnostics Output Ping Results aormizal Use the Diags tab as a troubleshooting tool The functions are as follows Re Connect Enables Disables the radio applies reapplies current profile and tries to associate and authenticate to the w
23. scancode Remar_4 gt vey s cfurnicode VK_O a U 0061 VK_O b U 0062 VK_O Y c U 0063 Add Change Remove B gt i HbF The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and CTRL and SHIFT states to Unicode values This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value For example the sample screen above shows a U 0061 indicating that the character a is represented by the Unicode value 0061 and so on Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than decimal values All user defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value and then by order of the shift state If a Unicode mapping is not listed the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value Adding and Changing Unicode Values AN Important Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard Properties dialog box e Choose the Add Change button WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 103 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties Figure 5 2 Adding And Change Unicode Values Change Unicode Mapping OK E WK SPACE VK_O i aT SHIFT Pressed CTRL Pressed Unicode Mapping O foozo Default Unicode Mapping 0 0x0030 Se Mas A Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list In the sample screen above a value will be assigned t
24. Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40 and must be fully charged prior to use Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking sta tions along with aWORKABOUT PRO internal charger When using the internal charger a suitable power source is required All chargers and docking stations are described in Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories beginning on page 169 Note Ifyou are powering up a new unit a warning message may appear on the screen indicating that the backup battery capacity is low To recharge the internal battery you must fully charge the WORKABOUT PRO with the main battery installed in the unit The Backup Battery To preserve data stored in your WORKABOUT PRO while you swap the main battery the unit is equipped with a backup battery a replaceable rechargeable Lithium Ion backup battery that can be ordered through Psion Teklogix The backup battery will supply 5 minutes of continuous power while you install a charged main battery The backup battery is trickle charged from the main battery Provided that the main battery contains power the backup battery will maintain a charge whether the WORKABOUT PRO is switched on or off in a docking station or in a cradle Even when the main battery reaches its Suspend Threshold refer to Suspend Threshold on page 112 and the hand held shuts down the backup battery will continue to draw a trickle charge from the
25. Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Performing a Cold Reset AN Note You do not need to reset your WORKABOUT PRO after configuring the radio 2 12 2 Performing a Cold Reset A cold reset clears the object store memory and restarts the operating system Registry set tings are maintained All installed programs and data files not located on permanent memory storage media such as the Flash Disk partition are lost To perform a cold reset and launch the Windows CE 5 0 operating system through the BooSt menu e Press and hold down the centre SCAN key and the FN BLUE and ENTER keys simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds After a cold reset the BooSt menu appears listing possible BooSt commands e Type 1 to load the Windows CE 5 0 operating system 38 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual GET To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO 3 3 1 Features of the WORKABOUT PRO ooo 41 32 The Battery e tt id Eel 42 3 2 1 Battery Satety om e e as ES ea TM Wawa eee s 43 3 2 2 Removing the Battery Pack o 0 000 eee 43 3 2 2 1 Battery Swap Time 2 2 o o 43 3 2 3 Charging the Battery 2 o e 44 3 2 3 1 Chargers and Docking Stations 4 44 3 3 Switching the Hand Held On and Off o 45 3 4 The Keyboard btt A ec in he ey ee uh ER eek da 45 3 4 1 Modifier Keys p pos gi wy Cards Glee Oe ie a a es es 45 3 4 1 1 Activating Modifier Keys 2 0040
26. Class 3 Public Prim Entrust net Certifi Entrust net Secur View Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root c Remove 130 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 8 Chapter 5 Configuration COM Port Manager Your WORKABOUT PRO has certificates already preinstalled in the computer My Certif icates establish your identity Other Authorities certificates identify intermediate certification authorities and Trusted Authorities certificates establish the identity of the servers with which you can connect You can import or remove certificates and view certificate information for any listing in cluding names dates serial numbers etc Note When importing certificates the WORKABOUT PRO only recognizes cer files COM Port Manager The COM Port Manager dialog box lists the device names and COM port mappings stored in the registry for the currently active and for dynamic devices like port replicators USB serial dongles and virtual ports The COM Port Manager allows you to edit the COM port mappings and add new ports for Bluetooth external connections COM Port Manager x l fBluetooth CF Slot o IR Comm COMO Port Replicator COMS Port Replicator COME Port Replicator COM PsionTeklogix G COM1 Virtual Port Come Add Bluetooth Save E Dza ai Note A grey box to the left of a Device name indicates that this is a fixed port the COM Port assignment cannot be changed For th
27. Options Translations Ports Tether Port device COM21 Port Replicator Port A COMS Enabled off Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Trigger On Sequence 00 Ol Trigger Off Sequence 00 Of Port Replicator Port B COM6 Enabled off To change a setting press space or double click Sao Si Bb gt The following COM ports are available COM5 COM6 and COM7 Note Each port provides identical parameters to help you set up the port you choose They are described in this section Enabled This parameter allows you to turn this port on enable and off Baud Double tapping on this parameter displays a pop up window in which you can choose an ap propriate baud rate 156 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Ports Tab Data Bits This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte Most devices use 8 bit data bytes Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the tether port Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose the appropriate Parity Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 7 1 5 2 used for asynchronous communication Trigg
28. Security Data Configuration Driver Mode Modem Info User Interface Status Ready to connect Connect Data Rx Tx bytes 2 4 BS wl B 1 4 1 Data Configuration WWAN Data Configuration LAN co ordination 1 Use virtual serial port V Enable automatic configuration Active profile Default Select profile Default y Show Edit Delete Activate New Enable Automatic Connect If the Enable automatic connect checkbox is checked unchecked by default the Wireless WAN user interface will attempt to establish a GPRS connection whenever GPRS is avail able e g after resume from suspend without further user interaction B 6 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN To activate the automatic connection mode Tap on the OK button While automatic connection mode is enabled the Connect Data button in the main Wireless LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto To close the currently active connection if any and disable the automatic connection mode Tap on Disable Auto Important Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than the Wireless WAN user interface e g Connection Manager are expected to open and close connections If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another application closes the GPRS connection the WWAN user interface will immediately try to re esta
29. Working With Windows CE 5 0 describes the Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 desktop and how to use it This chapter also out lines the basics of moving around a Windows CE 5 0 window selecting and opening icons files folders and working with a Windows dialog box Chapter 5 Configuration describes the Windows CE 5 0 Control Panel and how to use it to configure the WORK ABOUT PRO along with the scanners attached to the hand held and so on Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for WORKABOUT PRO hand helds Chapter 7 Specifications lists radio hand held computer and battery specifications Appendix A Port Pinouts describes the WORKABOUT PRO pinouts Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN describes WWAN configuration information GPRS radio model no RA3030 Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU provides detailed descriptions of the SCU tabs WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Text Conventions Appendix D Bar Code Settings describes the bar codes supported by the scanners and imagers available for the WORKABOUT PRO Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet describes the Teklogix Imagers applet and how to use it to set up your imager Text Conventions Note Notes highlight additional helpful information Important These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that i
30. Y Warehouse A pr the top of this list Refresh Q Warehouse A Status Associating with Warehouse A Signal Strength No Signal Delete Notify me when new wireless Properties networks are available Automatically connect to non Connect Advanced Log preferred networks Networks to access fan available y e Moa i Non Preferred Networks Normally WORKABOUT PRO connects to a preferred network listed in this dialog box To connect to a non preferred network add a checkmark in the check box to the left of Auto matically connect to non preferred network Networks to Access By tapping on this drop down menu you can narrow which networks your unit will attempt to access All available Only access points or Only computer to computer Rearranging Preferred Networks The WORKABOUT PRO attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialog box in sequence beginning at the top of the list If you need to rearrange this list of networks move networks up and down in the list e Move the cursor into the networks list and highlight the network that you want to move up or down in the list WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 23 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring the Summit RA2041 802 11b g To move the highlighted item in the list upward or downward tap on the Up or Down button 2 4 3 4 Deleting a Preferred Network To delete a network from this list In the networks list
31. can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 3500 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details 2D Maxicode Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D Maxicode WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 37 Appendix D Bar Code Settings 2D Aztec D 3 32 D 3 33 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 150 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details 2D Aztec Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D Aztec Aztec Runes Aztec Runes the smallest type of Aztec Code symbol has the ability to encode a very short license plate message Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 3750 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remov
32. check digit D 15 29 Dim For backlight 96 Discrete 20f5 D 16 31 D 54 Discrete 2 0f5 D 16 31 display appearance colour scheme 97 backlight 95 backlight adjusting 50 Display Properties 95 Display parameters scanner settings 149 Display Properties 95 docking device icons 55 docking station uploading data using 56 docking stations 185 desktop docking station 187 installation at site 185 operator controls 86 quad dock 798 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Ill IV Index Dot Time D 2 double click appending characters to a decoded bar code 148 scanner trigger 148 Double Click Manage Triggers menu 137 Double Tap stylus settings 1 6 Dr Debug 132 DSSS 802 11a g b radio 2 6 DSSS 802 11b g radio 2 6 E EAN 13 D J0 23 D 46 EAN 8 D 10 24 D 47 EAN 8 Zero Extend D 0 EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 19 ECI Decoder D 6 Enable Bookland UPC EAN D 2 Enable CC AB D 18 D 56 Enable CC C D 8 D 56 Enable Plessy D 5 Enable RSS Expanded D 17 32 D 55 Enable RSS Limited D 17 32 D 55 Enable RSS 14 D 17 D 55 Enable TLC 39 D 18 34 Encryption 802 11 wireless properties 17 ESC Key 47 Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP 19 F features WORKABOUT PRO 4 Field Size D 9 Flush Mount Pistol Grip installing 179 FNC1 Conversion D 45 formatting entire memory card 140 partitions 143 Full Ascii D 44 Full ASCII decoded scanner D 8 22 Function Keys accessing 47 G
33. human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 48 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Discrete 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Discrete 2 of 5 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 48 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Telepen Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Telepen Output If you choose AIM Output the imager reads symbols with start stop pattern 1 and decodes them as standard full ASCII start stop pattern 1 If you choose Original Output the imager reads symbols with start stop pattern 1 and decodes them as compressed numeric with op tional full ASCII start stop pattern 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 31 Appendix D Bar Code Settings RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology D 3 20 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of
34. it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit If Check Digits is set to Two it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits Note If Two check digits is selected an MSI Plessey Check Digit Algorithm must also be selected See below for details Transmit Check Digit If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the bar code data Check Digit Algorithm When the Two MSI Plessey check digits option is selected an additional verification is re quired to ensure integrity Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box n which you can choose the algorithm to be used MOD 10 MOD 11 or MOD 10 MOD 10 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 15 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Discrete 2 of 5 Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 can be set for Any length Length within a range One dis crete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One
35. levice 7 Serial Select Port w O Scanner C OBEX OPP 45 i7 When a remote Bluetooth device initiates a Bluetooth connection to the WORKABOUT PRO the remote device is considered the Bluetooth master and the hand held the Blue tooth slave In order for the remote device to connect to the WORKABOUT PRO the WORKABOUT PRO must offer a service in the form of a server The Servers tab allows these services to be enabled and configured There are three server services available Serial Scanner and OBEX OPP Serial server enables the Serial Port Profile server a Serial Port can be selected from the drop down menu Keep in mind that when a port is chosen an application must be open connected to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect Scanner server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service SCS This is used for Bluetooth bar code scanners that operate in client mode SCS opens the server port and handles the scanner input OBEX OPP server enables the Object Push Profile server A warm reset must be performed on the WORKABOUT PRO after a change is made to this option The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth devices to send files to this device Tap on the checkbox to activate the server the associated port name is displayed beside the server name 124 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 6 4 5 6 5 Chapter 5 Configuration Mode T
36. 0 The Desktop Icons 4 3 1 68 The Desktop Icons The icons displayed in the startup desktop operate in much the same way as those displayed on any standard PC desktop that is running Windows My Device Choosing this icon displays the contents of your WORKABOUT PRO computer If you re not sure how to access the files folders and programs displayed refer to Working with Files Folders and Programs on page 66 Recycle Bin This option temporarily stores items that were deleted allowing you to either permanently delete or restore these items Internet Explorer Choosing this icon launches nternet Explorer a standard Windows CE 5 0 version Keep in mind that your supervisor will need to set up access using the Internet Options and the Network and Dial up Connections icons in the Control Panel Microsoft WordPad Microsoft WordPad is a basic word processor used to create edit view and print text documents Remote Desktop Connection This option allows your WORKABOUT PRO to communicate with a remote desktop PC Remote Connect on page 87 provides a website with step by step instructions WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 The Taskbar The Taskbar A he A Pr My Device My Documents o Recycle Bin 4 a Internet Explorer E ov Microsoft WordPad GUIP The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the scr
37. 1 Creating a Backup Profile Total Recall Create Profile Restore Profile View Profile Delete Profile Current AutoRestore Profile none In the start up screen you can choose from four options Create Profile Restore Profile View Profile and Delete Profile Tap on the Create Profile button to begin the process 158 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Creating a Backup Profile Profile Information Total Recall Profile Name Default1 Type JautoRestore y Profile Location Flash Disk ea The latest auto restore profile will be automatically restored after a clean boot or a cold boot This dialog box displays the default profile name the type of restore AutoRestore or Man ualRestore and the possible storage destination for the profile file To change the Profile Name optional tap on the button to the right of the Profile Location field In the Name field type a new name You may need to move the onscreen keyboard down to make the Name field visible Tap on OK to save the new profile name Next choose the profile Type you want to create ManualRestore creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator AutoRestore creates a profile that automatically restores itself following a cold reset or a clean reset Finally if you want to choose another location for your backup file optional tap on the
38. 108 5 5 4 1 Volume Adjustments 2 00200005 109 5 5 4 2 Sound Adjustments 0 0 00 pee eee 109 5 5 4 3 Microphone Adjustments 0000 110 5 5 5 Power Management Properties 0 20 0000 0 Ge 110 5 5 5 1 Battery Capacity Tab 111 5 5 5 2 Suspend Tab e 111 5 5 5 3 Suspend Threshold o 112 A A 8 WR ee ae ea es Gaertn Aga 113 525 529 DEVICES ii a awh ER a aie ii 114 5 5 5 6 Built In Devices 2 2 2 o 114 A ss 355 lice sae a eek eee Bak chee eee ath 114 5 5 5 8 Suspend Mode 2 2 0 0 0 e 115 5 5 6 stylus Properties o a ihe 05 geld Woe a IA dd ke 116 53 61 Double Tap ser sete ete hee woe ee id ee A ee 116 5 5 6 2 Calibration io sine 4h a Roa eee OS BER ae 116 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 83 84 925 6 3 TOUCHE ri ok Bike Bete ena a Wa be Cae hua fe ES 117 5 6 Bluetooth SEP ii etl Baw ia bon a ey ae BO a eS 117 5 6 Paired Tab I ceca a he ae Dla ye Soe wo ee ee Be 118 3 02 Device Tab bch og tla itn E MOS Be EI es 120 5 6 2 1 Discovering and Removing Devices 000 120 5 6 2 2 Filtering By Class of Device COD 121 5 6 2 3 Device Pop up Meda 121 5 6 2 4 Pairing a Device 2 el 122 56 3 Servers Tab oi bo ae a ow ek Hae ee BP a D a ea 124 526 4 Mode Tab iio cece ahs tak Bel ee ee ee ot ee ee ad eS 125 5 6 S About Ta bn i bee ao Bad
39. 148 Decoded D 2 displaying type of bar code 149 Options tab 148 Ports tab 153 Scanner menu 146 scanner settings 146 symbologies Codabar D 14 27 D 50 Code 11 29 D 52 Code 128 D 9 Code 93 D 13 26 D 49 Discrete 2 of 5 D 16 31 D 54 EAN 13 D 10 23 D 46 EAN 8 D 10 24 D 47 IATA 2 of 5 30 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual ll Index Interleaved 2 of 5 D 15 29 D 52 Matrix 2 of 5 30 D 53 MSI Plessey D 14 28 D 51 UPC A D II 25 D 47 UPCE D 11 25 D 48 Translation tab 150 bar code reader integrated scanner operation of 204 batteries a description of 82 Advanced tab Power Properties 1 3 backup battery cover secure 82 Built in Devices tab Power Properties 114 capacity dialog box 111 charging 11 44 Devices tab Power Properties 114 gauge 54 installing 42 installing main battery 12 main battery 11 pinouts 4 3 power saving Suspend tab 1 11 removing 42 run time 35 storing 56 Suspend Mode tab Power Properties 115 Suspend Threshold tab 1 2 swap time 43 Wakeup tab Power Properties 114 battery charger safety instructions 186 187 battery cover secure 182 battery specifications 227 high capacity WA3006 221 233 super high capacity WA3010 227 Battery tab Power Properties 111 Baud 754 156 beeper beep conditions 52 volume adjustment 52 Bi Direction Redundancy D 5 BKSP DEL Key 46 Bluetooth devices pairing 37 122 Bluetooth radio ISM band 1 7 radio configuration 117 WORK
40. 2 Texts Gony enti ons socns annexe O Rie Re Rie ote OPKK 4 1 3 WORKABOUT PRO Features 0 0 0 0 0c ccceceeeeceececeeeecueusueeseseneevaeeeenss 4 1 4 The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand Held 00 00 ccc cece eee eeeeeceeen errire rren 6 1 5 The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand Held 0 ccccececeeeeeseseseseseeneseeeeey 7 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout 2 1 Preparing the WORKABOUT PRO for Operation 0 0cc0cceceeceeeeeeeeeeues 11 271 Ma Bd A dove 11 21 2 The Backup Battery 000 as 11 2 2 Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off 0 0ccceeeecececeeceeeeueueeeenes 12 2 2 1 Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On 0 cee eee eee es 12 2 2 2 Switching the Unit Off Suspend amp Standby 0c cece eee e eee ee ees 13 2 3 Calibrating the Touchscreen 06 c cece c cece e eee e eee rra 13 2 4 Configuring the 802 11a b g RA2043 Compact Flash Radio o0oooooooommmmo 14 2 4 1 Assigning an IP Address cece cece eee e cence renee een rro 20 2 4 2 Name Servers Taborda ideada 22 243 Advanced Features coito roo AA A RRRRReS 23 2 5 Configuring the Summit RA2041 802 11b g oooooooooccoconccrcncocrnrcrnrn ooo 24 2 5 1 Assigning the IP Address 0c cece cece cece eee nee rr rro 24 2 52 NameServer Tabs 26 2 5 3 Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN oooooooccoocccccccccncrnnnrrrnnnos 27 2 6 Checkins the Scam lcd ie o ao 30 2 7 Connecting the WORKABO
41. 2 cece eee ees 217 7 2 4 Model RA3040 G2 Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem eee eee 218 ADS Blutooth sa eerop ii aa Enne AS SEE EES ESE ERS wits Oa 220 73 Battery Specifications ccs ehekeage tected eat dee EEN EEG ORES TONES Os 221 7 3 1 High Capacity Model WA3006 0 0 cece eect e ee eee eee e ene ns 221 7 3 2 Super High Capacity Model WA3010 00 cece cece eee ee ee ee enes 227 71 33 Backup Batlle AI A a eth 233 7 4 Scanner Imager Model Numbers 000 cece cece eee eee eee eeeee ee eneneenees 235 75 Scanner Special it dde A N SN 236 7 5 1 SE1223HP LR and SE9SSHP Specifications 0 0 0 0 c cece eee neces 236 7 5 2 SE1524ER Scanner Specifications 000 cece cece c eee e eee e eee rs 239 7 5 3 EV15 Imager Specifications 0 cece cece cence eee e eee e een eeeenes 242 TSA SX5400 Imager cee scccccckccccgnsresnasinrs eeeheeeteneeeiaaeeeeees sees iii 243 Tad LPS AS AAA aa 245 Appendix A Port Pinouts A l LIF Low Insertion Force Port Pinout 00 cece ccc reser e eee ee eee eneeeenees A 1 vi WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Contents A2 Tether Port Pinot ed A 2 A 3 Battery Contact Pinout WA3006 amp WA3010 0 cece eee e eee e eee e eee eeeeee cence A 3 A4 Positive Female Battery Connector 00 ccc cee eee e eet e eee rra rro A 3 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Bele Wireless WAN
42. 32 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 21 D 3 22 A Appendix D Bar Code Settings PosiCode Reduced Space Symbology PosiCode Reduced Space Symbology Enable Setting this parameter to on enables PosiCode scanning capability PosiCode PosiCode is a position based symbology A position based symbology de couples the widths of the bars from their positions The centers of the bars are specified to be laid out on a grid of equally spaced parallel lines The distance between these grid lines is called the G dimension and is analogous to the X dimension of conventional bar codes There are two variations of this code PosiCode A and PosiCode B The options available with this parameter allow to choose A and B A and B and Limited A or A and B and Limited B Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Composite Important To successfully read this type of bar code the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled A composite symbol includes multi row 2D components
43. 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Programs 4 4 3 Programs Choose Programs from the Start Menu to display a sub menu of options r E a My Device My Docurnents vw x Recycle Bin Remote Desktob TY Microsoft WordPad Remote Connect Fid Windows Explorer ActiveSync This option allows you to connect to another device using ActiveSync If you need to down load this communication software go to http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 147001 Look for the ActiveSync link Demo This folder contains the Demo Scanner Demo Signature and Demo Sound applications Demo Scanner can be used to test how the hand held reads and writes RFID tags Demo Sig nature allows you to capture a signature written on the screen with your stylus and save it to a file Demo Sound allows you to record and playback The Sample Rate and the Bits Per Sample are the rates at which the sound will be recorded Sounds recorded at the higher sample rate or bits per sample will be higher quality but will require more file space to store Lower sample rates and bits per sample or both the file result in a smaller file but the quality suffers The record and play buttons operate in the same way they do on any recording device the X icon deletes the sound and the diskette icon allows you to save your sound Summit This folder provides access to the Summit Client Utility SCU a utility that allows you to configure your Sum
44. 46 3 4 1 2 Locking Modifier Keys 0 0 0 2 000040 46 SAD ANC Keys ice ren ee an edn i A a A OE eS 46 3 4 3 Function Keys and Macro KeyS o a 47 3 4 3 1 Function Keys ee 47 3 4 3 2 Macro Keys WORKABOUT PRO C Only est bales ting a 48 3 4 4 Alpha Keyboard Accessing Keys 2 2 0 eee eee 48 3 4 6 Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alphanumeric Keys 49 3 4 7 The Keypad Backlight o o ee 50 3 The Displays certo 4 A A Rbk A a eo Ree 50 3 5 1 Adjusting the Display Backlight 50 3 5 2 Calibrating the Touchscreen o ee ee ee 51 3 6 WORKABOUT PRO Indicators ee 51 A AAA 51 3 6 2 Audio Indicators s i tecto eon e a aa anaa i e E E R AT a a 52 3 6 2 1 Adjusting WORKABOUT PRO Speaker Volume 52 3 6 3 Onscreen Indicators 2 53 3 7 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time 55 3 7 1 Storing Batteries oaa a 56 3 8 Uploading Data In A Docking Station o oo a a 56 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 39 3 9 Bluetooth Radio 57 3 9 1 Pairing a Bluetooth Headset or Other Bluetooth Device 57 3 10 Inserting The SD MMC Card And SIM Card o o o o o oo ooo 59 3 10 1 Inserting And Removing The Card o o o o o o 59 3 Il General Mamtenance ia Bete eh A A te ee GO Ga 61 3 11 1 Caring For The Touchscreen 2 2 2
45. A Settings UPC A Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A bar code scanning recognition Check Digit If you enable this parameter a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Transmit Number System If this parameter is enabled the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data Addendum Add on 2 And Addendum Add on 5 An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or 5 characters Addendum Required When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Addendum Separator Addendum Separator is a space that is added between the UPC A bar code and the Add on code Addenda When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details UPC E Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC E Enabled UPC E1 Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E1 zero suppressed bar code scans Expand This parameter expands the UPC E code to a 12 digit UPC A format WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 25 Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPC EAN Shared Settings Check Digit If you enable this parameter a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Transmit Number
46. C3 Radio Se Attribute Description Value Default Radio Mode Used by 802 11g when interacting B rates only 1 2 5 5 amp 11 Mbps BG with access point G rates only 6 9 12 18 24 36 rates 48 and 54 Mbps opti BG rates full All B and G rates mized BG rates optimized 1 2 5 5 6 11 24 36 amp 54 Mbps Auth Type 802 11 authentication type used Open shared key or LEAP Net Open when associating with access point work EAP EAP Type amp Encryption Security settings These settings allow you to enhance the security of data across the wireless LAN Refer to EAP Credentials on page C 5 and SCU Security Capabilities on page C 4 below for details about these settings e Credentials Authentication credentials for the selected EAP type Refer to EAP Cre dentials on page C 5 for details additional information The user name or domain user name and password entered can contain up to 64 characters For PEAP a CA Cert CA server certificate file name is required SCU Security Capabilities The SCU provides integrated security to protect transmitted data as well as the hand held and wireless WAN infrastructure that transmit and receive data A foundational element of the IEEE 802 111 WLAN security standard is IEEE 802 1X anda critical application on a mobile device is an 802 1 X supplicant This supplicant provides an interface between the radio and the operating system a
47. CE 5 0 device Refer to the following website for step by step information about setting up this connection http www microsoft com windowsxp using mobility getstarted remoteintro mspx You can also contact Psion Teklogix support services Locate the office closest to you at www psionteklogix com service and support htm You can also refer to WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000126 for support information The TekTerm Application TekTerm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction ap plications associated with mainframes and servers The WORKABOUT PRO includes unique features that support TekTerm a Psion Teklogix application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers For detailed in formation please refer to the TekTerm Software User Manual PN 8000073 The Control Panel The Windows CE 5 0 Control Panel provides a group of icons through which you can set a variety of system wide properties such as mouse sensitivity network configuration and the desktop color scheme Note If you are uncertain how to move around a dialog box and make selections review Using a Dialog Box on page 81 When the WORKABOUT PRO boots up the startup desktop shell is displayed and any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately To access the Control Panel e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control
48. DAT UPCA o ss D 47 DAS WRC EA carrera D 48 D 4 9 UPC EAN Shared AAA ec HERE OE IR D 48 DATO COLS sais aa eee GGL EE TERETE II ARI ati D 49 D411 Codabat sc cscs dd Eben ata cee es D 50 D 4 12 MSI Pleno abana nego EER D 51 DAM Codet Pana ai D 52 D 4 14 Interleaved Ze D 52 DAIS Matrix 2 08 3422223122320 A D 53 D 4 16 Discreta tried D 54 DEA E ess atado Do D 54 D 4 18 RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology 00 cee ceee eee eeeeeeeees D 55 DATIL Composites feiss de Mak o nad LE ELISA D 56 D420 FIC A hoes ieee es 8a Soueaeaeaeieen sk UN UNUNON EN AAAS SAAAASGA E NS D 56 D421 0B Sle a aa Or ra D 57 D 4 22 Micro PDE AVT acd cscccccccdid dnc tiie eed as D 57 D4237 Codablocks axsassacsaaacdnaaeed IRA RRA RAR D 58 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual ix x Contents Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet E1 Required Applets aia E 1 EZ POS A AAA tai E 1 HDA Predefined Press cios Ad E 2 E 2 2 Bar Code Predefined Presets 0 ee ccee eee ient nee e eee eeeean neces E 2 E 2 3 Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets 0 e ee ceeeeee eee ees E 3 E 2 4 Image Capture Predefined Presets 00 cece cece ec ce eee e eee eeneeeeenes E 4 E 3 Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet 00 cece cece eee ete eee ee eee nneeeennees E 4 E 3 1 Configuring the Image Capture Presets ccc eee cece eee e eee eeeees E 4 Ei3 2 Selecting a Camera ye e ceecneaueaceassaeasaceteeso
49. Desktop Docking Station Model No WA4003 G2 Quad Docking Station For 7527C G2 Model No WA4204 G2 Quad Docking Station For 7527S G2 Model No WA4304 G2 Installation Chargers and Docking Stations When installing a charger or docking station consider the following guidelines e Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt dust and contaminants WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 185 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Power Consumption Considerations 6 9 2 6 9 3 6 9 4 186 e Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F It is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at room temperature between 18 C and 25 C 64 F to 77 F for maximum performance After unpacking your unit e Visually inspect the charger for possible damage Install the IEC power cord and apply power Power Consumption Considerations Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and or docking stations is adequate for the load especially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the same circuit e Quad charger can consume up to 2A 120VAC or 1A Y 240VAC e Quad docking station can consume up to 3A 120VAC or 1 5A 240VAC Operator Controls WORKABOUT PRO docking stations and chargers have no operator controls or power switches Important Charger Safety Instructions
50. E Advanced Options E 2D Scanning Options E Data Options Code 39 Code 128 H EAN 13 ESN 8 E UPC A PoE a To change a setting press space or double click The drop down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from one of the following scanner types used with your WORKABOUT PRO Decoded internal Decoded HHP or Decoded Intermec ISCP The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes it supports AN Important To improve the decode speed and performance enable only those codes that are required by the application WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 1 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Decoded Internal Scanner Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed All internal scanners can be configured using the Barcode dialog boxes D 2 Decoded Internal Scanner Options EH Advanced Options E 2D Scanning Options Data Options Code 39 Code 128 E EAN 13 ESN 8 UPC A UPC E To change a setting press space or double click D 2 1 Options Decoded Internal Scanner Dot Time msec The value selected for Dot Time msec determines in milliseconds how long the target ing dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0
51. EEEE EO EEE ONS 144 Teklogix Scanner Settings ai owed onde DESRENA 146 5 16 1 The Scanner Menu 0 ccc ccc eect e eee e eee eee e ene eee neeenneeeenns 146 5 16 2 Restoring Default Settings 0 0 cc cece cece eee eee eee eee ee eeneeenes 147 516 3 Options bios 148 5 16 4 Translations Tab yu IAN 150 5 16 5 Ports Tabi ccccceccecccccccee en a aa aaoo EKKE 153 Total Recalls c 32 5223 shsshisbacecieeeenecgud ieee sees eqhhsShSSSAssad E E EE 158 5 17 1 Creating a Backup Profile 0 0 cee cee cece eee e eee eee eee ee eeneeenes 158 5 17 2 Restoring a Profile suscritos 161 171 3 Viewing aProfiless2 222324228862 Sai 162 SITA Deleting a Profle e as 163 Tweak T CAME a a S A SS OAR RRR ae n 163 S181 Advanced n EEEE EEEO EEEE ENANA Ea AEAEE TE 163 LSD US IIA A AA RRRA R in 166 5 18 3 Registry EditOT 0 cece cece cece eee eect eee eeen EE Eis 168 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 Carrying ACCESSO CS errr irnn been de beens IA 173 Attaching the Hand Strap 0 0 cece eee c eee e cece tenn eee eee c a nn ete eeeenneeeees 173 Attaching the Pistol Grip sccocseccescnnsssiss diras 175 The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip 0 0 2 ceeee eee ees 176 Protective Carrying Case aro RO ARARA EEEE EIE EEAS 181 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 2
52. Frequency Range WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Compact Flash Type I II extended Integrated antenna two antenna diversity Maximum 18 dBm including antenna gain varies with data rate channels and environment 280mA maximum continuous receive power Standby idle 17mA while associated to the network 4 9 5 85 GHz 2 4 to 2 5 GHz Channels FCC 802 11a 24 802 11b g 11 ETSI 802 1la 19 802 11b g 13 Japan 802 11a 35 802 11b g 14 Range 3000 ft typical max outdoor 300 ft typical max office environment Data Rates 1 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54Mbps 7 2 3 Model RA3030 G2 GSM GPRS EDGE Radio Quad Band GSM 850 900 1800 1900 MHz EDGE E GPRS multi slot class 12 GPRS multi slot class 12 GSM release 99 Output power Class 4 2 W for EGSM850 Class 1 1 W for GSM1800 Class 1 1 W for GSM1900 Control via AT commands Hayes 3GPP TS 27 007 and 27 005 SIM Application Toolkit release 99 Supply voltage range 3 2 to 4 3 V Specifications for EDGE data transmission EDGE class 12 max 236 8 kbps downlink Mobile station class B Modulation and coding scheme MCS 1 9 GPRS data transmission GPRS class 12 Mobile station class B PBCCH support Coding schemes CS 1 4 CSD data transmission Up to 14 4 kbps V 110 SMS Fax Voice Interfaces Non transparent mode USSD support Point to point MO and MT SMS cell broadcast Text and PDU mode Gr
53. IPv6 Support Advanced Tab Determine how internet pages behave on your unit display images play sounds enable scripting and script error notification Security Tab Block or allow cookies and allow versions of TLS Transport Layer Secu rity and SSL Secure Socket Layer security Security Zone Tab Determine the security level for websites local network sites trusted sites and sites you ve restricted When available the Sites button allows you to add to a list IPv6 Support The JPv6 Support icon in the Control Panel allows you to activate IPv6 network support on your unit if your network setup requires this This internet protocol specification version 6 supports 128 bit IP addresses replacing version 4 RG IPv6 Support e Choose the IPv6 Support icon to display the associated dialog box IP 6 Support ok x Enable IPv6 Support Enable IPv6 network support by checking the box below Note that if you change this setting your device will reset to activate the change e Choose the checkbox next to Enable IPv6 Network Support to enable this internet protocol Manage Triggers This option allows you to configure how bar code scanners and other devices such as RFID readers are triggered You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single and double click and the double click time WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 135 Chapter 5 Configuration
54. Manual 7 Chapter 1 Introduction The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand Held Figure 1 3 WORKABOUT PRO S with QWERTY Keyboard PIsiiOlN TEKLOGIX 8 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual BASIC CHECKOUT 2 2 1 Preparing the WORKABOUT PRO for Operation 00 11 2 1 1 The Main Battery 2 ee ee 11 2 1 1 1 Charging the Main Battery o o o o o 11 2 1 2 The Backup Battery o o ee ee 11 2 2 Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off 12 2 2 1 Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On 12 2 2 2 Switching the Unit Off Suspend amp Standby 13 2 3 Calibrating the Touchscreen o oo o 13 2 4 Configuring the 802 11a b g RA2043 Compact Flash Radio 14 2 4 1 Assigning an IP Address 2 2 o e 20 2 42 Name Servers Tab ts aie o ra a a rr 22 24 3 Advanced Features cis a ra da 23 2 4 3 3 Rearranging Preferred Networks o o 23 2 4 3 4 Deleting a Preferred Network o o ooo 24 2 4 3 5 Changing Network Properties o o o 24 2 5 Configuring the Summit RA2041 802 11b 8 o o o 24 2 5 1 Assigning the IP Address 2 2 o e e o 24 2 5 2 Name Servers Tab vin aj a a Ah Era as eh ee aS 26 2 5 3 Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN 27 25 3 SSID A IA RRA RN 29 2 EAP Types a A A e be age 29 209 3 ENCIMA a 29 2 6 Checking
55. Manual v Contents 6 20 1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations 00c cece eee ee eee es 201 6 21 Mounting Template 0 cece ccc eee eee e eee eee ee cee ents rr 202 022 Wing Guidelines saessasaese yin abs 202 623 Using the Vehicle Cradle 2 325342 2422428852824 seer i 202 6 24 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle 02 0 0 0c cece cece cee eee e nee e rr 202 6 25 Powered Cradle Installation in High Voltage Vehicles 0ooooooommmmmmmro 202 6 26 Powered Vehicle Cradle Installati0M ooooooooooooocoroorrrrrrrrnrrrrrrrrns 203 6 26 1 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle 0 0 cece eee eee ee rererere 203 6 27 The Port Replicator iii 204 6 28 Scanners andIMavers ains iros 204 6 2821 Scanning Techniques eis s4 suse bs eA a ob sels ee ETES EEE 205 0 28 2 Troubl shootng 33 02 25 5056 bb oe 206 6 28 3 Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners 02s eee eee ee 206 6 28 4 Operating Two Dimensional 2D Imagers 6 cece eee eee eee eee 207 6 29 Bluetooth Peripherals 0 cece cece cece cee E E a rr 208 Chapter 7 Specifications 7 1 WORK ABOUT PRO Specificationsize 2 2222 e ans 211 TD Radio Specifications A AA Ra a SAD 216 7 2 1 Model RA2041 802 11 b g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS 216 7 2 2 Model RA2043 802 11a b g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS 216 7 2 3 Model RA3030 G2 GSM GPRS EDGE Radio
56. On Off List Driver SCU v2 01 12 About SCU El D gt i Aig gt Enable Disable Radio Enables or disables the radio This is a toggle button when the radio is enabled this button reads Disable Radio and when the radio is disabled the button reads Enable Radio Active Profile Lists the name s of the active configuration profile s which are referred to as configs When a profile is chosen from the Active Profile drop down menu the settings for that profile become active WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual C 1 Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU Profile Tab If ThirdPartyConfig is selected after the WORKABOUT PRO goes through a power cycle WZC is used for configuration of the radio See ThirdPartyConfig on page C 6 for details Status Indicates if the radio is associated to an access point If this is not the case Association Status indicates the radio status Radio Type Indicates the type of radio installed in the device e g ABG when an 802 11a b g radio is installed Reg Domain Indicates the regulatory domain e g ETSI FCC or TELEC for which the radio is configured Worldwide means that the radio can be used in any domain Auto Profile When this option is set to On SCU automatically switches between con figured network profiles depending on their availability To specify which networks will be scanned tap on the List button and add a checkmark nex
57. Panel If you re using the keyboard e Press the Windows START button to display the Start Menu Highlight Settings in Start Menu and press the RIGHT arrow key to highlight the Control Panel e Press the ENTER key WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 87 Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your WORKABOUT PRO Figure 5 1 Control Panel Keyboard Manage Triggers and Dial u e y COM Port Date Time Dialing Manager ga G Power RDC Region and Owner Password PC f Licenses Language Display Dr Debug Error Connection Reporting E EJ Y 2 Q Y R6 Remove Storage Stylus D Power RDC Region and Programs Manager Input Panel Internet IPv6 Licenses Language A Options Support EN a p a Ul PY PET EE System Teklogix Total Recall Remove Storage Stylus Scanners Programs Manager Jo TweakIT Volume amp Wireless Settings Sounds WAN v El D 45 gt E 5 4 Control Panel Icons The Control Panel provides a group of icons that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your WORKABOUT PRO App Launch Keys a By mapping keys to applications using this program you can then launch those applications App Launch from a single key press Keys Bluetooth Devices 3 Provides the tools to manage device pairing and configuration Bluetooth Devices C
58. Rx Tx as bytes a gt H 251 5 Choosing Taskbar displays a dialog box in which you can determine which Wireless WAN icons will be displayed in the taskbar Sounds Configure TaskBar Icons Enable New SMS icon Enable Voice Dialer icon OK x Tapping on the Sounds option displays a dialog box in which you can customize which sounds your hand held will emit and when these sounds will be played Configure Sounds OK x SMS Play new message notification startup wav v Voice Play ringtone Ring way y B 14 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 1 5 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN SMS Menu SMS Short Message Service functions are accessed through the SMS menu For modems that support a SIM card the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network ini tialization resulting in a noticeable delay before the SMS functions become available Wireless WAN ile Tools Syg Voice Inbox OutBox Network SMS Configuration Signal 77 65dBm Status Ready to connect Connect Data Rx Tx a bytes Z e 4 B u New Tapping on the New button opens a dialog for sending a new SMS message The recipient s phone number to be entered in the To field can consist of the digits 0 through 9 as well as the and characters optionally preceded by one character indicating an international number i e the country code foll
59. System If this parameter is enabled the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data Addendum Add on 2 And Addendum Add on 5 An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or 5 characters Addendum Required When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Addendum Separator Addendum Separator is a space that is added between the UPC E bar code and the Add on code Addenda When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 10 UPC EAN Shared Settings Extended Coupon Code This parameter specifies whether or not the imager will read only UPC A EAN 13 bar codes that have addenda nN Note The 2 or 5 digit addenda must be turned on off depending on the desired behavior D 3 11 Code 93 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93 D 26 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 12 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Codabar Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 0 to 8
60. Trigger Mappings Inthe Control Panel choose the Manage Triggers icon ea Manage Triggers In the Manage Triggers screen yov ll see a list of trigger mappings AWID E Up Down RFID File Systeri Fi Up Down Non Decoded S Grip Tri Up Down Non Decoded S Scan Up Down RFID File Syster E El Double click 0 1000 msec 250 Show all modules Remove 3 EYEE 5 13 1 Trigger Mappings A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application the module s sometimes referred to as trigger consumer s of the trigger source Along with keyboard keys trigger sources can also be grip triggers external hard ware triggers or software based When the specified key is pressed the trigger consumer for example a decoded scanner is sent a message A Important It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings for example F1 cannot be mapped to the Non Decoded Scanner twice even if the trigger type is different A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key data or perform its normal function For example if the space button is used as a trigger source it will not be able to send space characters to applications 136 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Trigger Mappings Double Click When a key is pressed and released then pressed again within the con
61. User Manual Se Dm O nm Licenses 7 Region amp Language Remove Programs 3 Storage Manager System ts x Teklogix Imagers Ill Teklogix Scanners Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons RDC Licenses The Terminal Services license server stores all license tokens that have been installed for a group of terminal servers and tracks licenses issued The Remote Desktop Licenses RDC application displays license tokens for devices that connect to a Terminal Server Region amp Language Allows you to specify the local language that is to be displayed on the hand held screen along with the format of numbers currency time and date for your region Remove Programs Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit To remove a program select it and then click on the Remove button Storage Manager Allows the user to view information about the storage devices that are present such as SD MMC flash cards For details see Partition Properties on page 142 Stylus Adjusts how Windows CE 5 0 recognizes your double tap as slow or rapid successive taps In the Calibration tab you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the Recalibrate button and following the directions on the screen System Displays system and memory properties In the Memory tab you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory Teklogix Imagers Used to create mo
62. WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 3 10 3 10 1 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Inserting The SD MMC Card And SIM Card Services that require more information present a configuration dialog box Serial Profile is an example Serial Profile Select profile options and press Next Encryption see Mode Serial ly Port Como LY Cancel Next Dubii This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and se lecting three different modes Serial ActiveSync and Scanner e Serial is used for simple serial port communication e ActiveSync is for ActiveSync over Bluetooth e Scanner is used to create a seamless connection between the incoming Bluetooth bar code and the WORKABOUT PRO Once you ve completed the information Tap on Next and then in the Services screen click on Done Inserting The SD MMC Card And SIM Card There are two slots available in the battery compartment the lower slot is provided for a SD MMC Secure Digital Multi Media Card and the upper slot is for a SIM Subscriber Identity Module card SD MMC cards provide additional non volatile memory to your hand held SIM cards allow access to the hand held Voice option access the Internet and so on Inserting And Removing The Card Press the Power button to switch off the WORKABOUT PRO e Remove the battery cover and the battery WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0
63. a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 2 to 60 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MSI Enable Plessey Set this parameter to on to enable Plessey Check Char When this parameter is set to Validate only the integrity of the symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms If Check Char is set to Validate and Transmit the check character is validated and trans mitted with the data Setting this parameter to None disables this function Minimum And Maximum Length These parameters apply to MST bar codes The length of a code refers to the number of char acters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 4 to 48 Plessey Minimum And Plessey Maximum Length These parameters apply to Plessey bar codes The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on D 28 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 14 D
64. amount of required bar code ori entation this is useful when scanning very long and or truncated bar codes Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a decode performance level of between 1 and 3 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details EAN 13 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details EAN 8 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 EAN 8 Zero Extend When this parameter is enabled five leading zeros are added to decoded EAN 8 symbols making them compatible in format to EAN 13 symbols Disabling this parameter returns EAN 8 symbols to their normal format D 10 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 2 9 D 2 10 Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPC A Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details UPC A Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A UPC A Check Digit If you enable this parameter the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data UPC A Preamble When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one of three options for lead in characters for UPC A symbols transmitted to the host device Sy
65. and contains the current parameters from the database The following actions are available Show The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap the stylus on this button For the Default profile the publicly known password is shown otherwise the password is hidden Edit The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit button Keep in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile Delete The selected profile is deleted You cannot delete the Default profile WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN Activate When this button is chosen the selected profile becomes the active profile Activation is possible only if the Enable automatic configuration checkbox is unchecked New Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile Figure B 3 Creating A New Profile New Data Profile OK El Name LL 1 IM APN Jintemet fido ca User name Password Prompt user for password Force PAP authentication Reset The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles Also the name cannot be Default When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened a pro posal for a unique name is filled in the corresponding entry field If a manually configured profile has a secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN has been entered the p
66. backlight intensity and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity ON For The value chosen from this drop down menu determines the duration of time that the key board backlight stays on when a unit is not in use Note Tapping in the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON forces the keypad backlight to remain on when the unit is operating with external power Keyboard One Shots Mode Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box tap on the One Shots tab Keyboard Properties OK Z Sequence Backlight One Shots al gt One Shot Modes Alt 3neShot Lock Shift Oneshot Lock y Ctrl oneshot Lock v Orange Oneshot Lock y Blue oneShot Lock y The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys on your WORKABOUT PRO behave For each modifier key ALT SHIFT CTRL ORANGE and BLUE you have the following options in the drop down menu Lock OneShot and OneShot Lock Note Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are locked on For example if the FN ORANGE key is locked on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays it in uppercase characters ORANGE KEY If this key is displayed in lowercase characters in the taskbar you ll know that the orange key is not locked It will become inactive following a key press WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual A 5 5 3 5 Chapter 5 Con
67. battery is inserted in the charger the colour and behaviour of the LED associated with the charge well in use indicates the status of the charge Refer to Table 6 2 on page 194 for details Troubleshooting 6 18 4 1 Excessive Charge Duration The charger is equipped with a recalibration function a function that fully discharges and then fully recharges the battery This process is necessary to recalibrate the battery capacity gauge internal to the battery The charger attempts recalibration when e the battery capacity is at less than 30 and e the battery has undergone more than 40 partial charge cycles since the last full discharge The recalibration function extends the charge time by up to 2 hours 6 18 4 2 Indicator Flashing Red If the indicator flashes red Remove all batteries and disconnect the mains power cable e Wait at least 20 seconds and then plug the cable in again If any of the charge well LEDs continue to flash red the charger is defective and requires service If all indicators are flashing red there is a power supply problem and the charger re quires service 196 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Troubleshooting 6 18 4 3 Power LED Does Not Light Up e Remove all batteries and unplug the charger e Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger and check it for dam
68. board Symbologies supported Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII UPC A A2 A5 UPC E E2 ES EAN 8 13 JAN I20f5 Code 128 Codabar NW7 RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded RSS 14 Truncated PDF417 microPDF417 Composite CC A CC B CC C image capture Data Matrix QR Code Maxicode Aztec Code Planet Postnet Royal Mail 4SCC 4 State postal codes from Australia Canada Japan Korean Post 3o0f5 Formerly known as Symagery SX5400 SX5400 Imager Performance The table below presents the typical performance of the SX5400 Imager at 300 lux 160mm focus when using Grade A photographic quality bar codes Listed are the average near far and Depth of Reading DOR numbers symbology Size mil anes inches inches C39 7 5 4 0 7 0 3 0 C39 10 2 75 9 25 6 5 C39 15 2 25 11 0 8 75 PDF6 6 6 6 4 0 6 5 2 5 PDF10 10 3 25 9 0 5 75 PDF15 15 2 25 10 75 8 5 DM15 15 3 0 8 0 5 0 QRIS 15 3 75 7 5 3 75 UPC 12 5 3 0 9 5 6 5 244 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual HHP5180 Imager Chapter 7 Specifications HHP5180 Imager Parameter HHP5180 Image Sensor 752 X 480 CMOS sensor Motion Tolerance 4 in 10 2cm per second Rotational Sensitivity 360 Viewing Angle 40 Ambient Light Total darkness to 100 000 lux full sunlight Illumination LEDs 626nm 30nm Aiming LEDs 526nm 30nm Laser 650nm 10nm Symbologi
69. can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remapping tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialog box Keyboard Properties OK Ba Scancode Remapping Lock Sequer_4 gt OB O Orange O Blue Add Remove l Edit Remove All The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the scancodes in hexadecimal If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key that virtual key is displayed in the next column la belled V Key A virtual key that is Shifted or Unshifted is displayed in the third column labelled Function If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number for example Macro 2 Adding a Remap To add a new remapping Choose the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 105 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties 106 The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed O Force Shifted O Force Unshifted No Force a mas 5 4 Type the scan code in hexadecimal in the field labelled Scancode Note The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping Virtual Key Function and Macro The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code will be remapped Virtual Key Function or Macro When Virtual Key is selecte
70. code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 2750 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details D 34 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 25 D 3 26 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Micro PDF 417 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Micro PDF 417 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Micro PDF 417 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 366 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Code 16K The Code 16K bar code is a multiple row bar code that can encode the full ASCII charac ter set below ASCII 128 It uses existing UPC and Code 128 character set patterns Up to 77 full ASCII characters or 154 numeric characters can be encoded into 2 to 16 rows Each row is divided by a separator bar The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones Enabl
71. displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Symbologies To configure the bar code decoding camera presets Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Teklogix Imagers icon ES Teklogix Imagers Tap on the Barcoding tab Figure E 3 Viewing Bar Code Decoding Symbologies Default Low light Low power View Add Remove Activate Barcode Presets Factory Default All Edit Add Remove Activate R Read W Write A Active Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right in Figure E 2 on page page E 8 the active preset is Defaults To set an active preset Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 11 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Creating a Custom Preset Highlight a preset and tap on the View button The associated preset window is displayed Symbology Settings jok x Preset Factory Default E Options E All 1D With Strong Recovery 2D Aztec Code 39 Code 128 E EAN 13 ESN 8 alL LINC Predefined settings are read only e Tap on the sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings E 4 10 Creating a Custom Preset E 4 11 A new
72. docking station the LED flashes red for less than a second and then turns green Battery charging continues whether the WORKABOUT PRO is switched on or off It can take up to 4 hours to fully charge the internal battery 6 19 6 Troubleshooting The indicators applications and drivers required to use and monitor the docking station are installed on the WORKABOUT PRO n0 indicators or applications are present on the docking station itself 6 19 6 1 Network Link Unsuccessful If a network link fails the WORKABOUT PRO application alerts the operator that the link was unsuccessful 6 19 6 2 Hand Held LED Does Not Light When Docked e Check that the quad docking station has power is the Power LED on the docking station illuminated Try inserting the WORKABOUT PRO in another well in the quad dock e Check for dirt or contamination on the docking contacts at the bottom of the WORKA BOUT PRO Wipe the contacts with a damp cloth if necessary e Check the pogo pins inside the dock cradle for dirt Gently wipe with a damp cloth if they appear to be dirty or discoloured e Check that the pogo pins are not bent or damaged Remove and reinsert the WORKABOUT PRO in the cradle and check that the latch is holding the unit in place the pogo pins must be compressed for proper contact Make certain that the battery installed in the WORKABOUT PRO is not defective 6 20 The Vehicle Cradle The vehicle cradle is a highly ruggedi
73. for exam ple this option is set to High the radio will begin searching for a new Access Point while WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 165 Chapter 5 Configuration User still at a fairly strong signal strength Setting AP Density to Low will cause the radio to wait until the signal strength is significantly low before attempting to connect to another Access Point Depending on your site configuration for example the shelving the Access Point cover age etc a higher setting may improve through put increase and maintain signal strength and reduce missed transmissions Radio Power Management When this option is enabled access points that support it will use Radio Power Management guidelines to control the client WORKABOUT PRO radio Access points determine how often the WORKABOUT PRO radio enters sleep mode when no activity is detected to reduce power consumption on the client side Another benefit is that when Radio Power Management is enabled even when no activity is detected the access point does not disas sociate the WORKABOUT PRO client 5 18 2 User 5 18 2 1 Internet Explorer Settings 166 This option allows you to customize how your Internet Explorer is displayed and how the tabbing functions TweakIT Settings advanced User Registry Editor EN internet Explorer Settings 1 Directional Tabbing 2 Fit to Screen 3 Focus Rectangle i User Display Settings User Syst
74. grip e Switch the power back on e Replace the battery and battery cover e Insert the stylus in the bottom of the pistol grip handle 180 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Protective Carrying Case 6 5 Protective Carrying Case A carrying case is available for WORKABOUT PRO s to shield the unit from damage It is equipped with a soft plastic window to protect the unit display and keyboard A variety of cases are available depending on the type of end cap attached to your unit 6 6 Soft Shell Holster A soft shell holster with removable belt and swivel holster pad can be used to hang a WORKABOUT PRO with a pistol grip from you waist Figure 6 2 Soft Shell Holster Soft Shell Holster Swivel Holster Pad and Removable Belt Insert the belt in the swivel holster pad e Attach the pad on either the left or right side of the holster case depending on whether you are left or right handed e Fasten the belt comfortably around your waist Slide the adjustable ring on the belt to tighten the holster in place WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 181 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Batteries 6 7 1 182 e Connect the safety tether to one of the clips on the bottom of the soft shell holster Connect the other end to the hole in the end of the WORKABOUT PRO pistol grip This tether will catch the unit in case of a dro
75. highlight the network that you want to remove Tap on the Delete button 2 4 3 5 Changing Network Properties To change the properties of an existing preferred network e Highlight the network that you want to modify Tap on the Properties button Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialog box and press ENTER to save the changes 2 5 Configuring the Summit RA2041 802 11b g Psion Teklogix supports the Summit 802 11b g Compact Flash CF wireless LAN radio card model number RA2041 It is a Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum radio This section describes the Summit Client Utility SCU used to configure the Summit 802 11b g Compact Flash radio module so that it can communicate through a wireless LAN effectively and securely 2 5 1 Assigning the IP Address Before launching the SCU you need to configure how the IP address will be obtained If your network is not using a DHCP server you will need to assign an IP address Tap on Start gt Settings gt Network and Dial up Connections If the Start Menu isn t displayed in the taskbar press FN BLUE 0 to display it If you re using the keyboard press FN BLUE 0 to display the Start Menu Use the DOWN arrow key to highlight Settings Press the RIGHT arrow key to display the sub menu Highlight Network and press ENTER e Choose the Summit WLAN Adapter icon to open the 802 11b g Wireless LAN Settings window In Figure 2 2 this icon is labelled
76. making it compatible with linear and area CCD scamners along with linear and rastering laser scanners The options available for this parameter represent multi level components of a composite symbol GS1 128 GS1 128 is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification The former correct name was UCC EAN 128 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 33 Appendix D Bar Code Settings TLC 39 D 3 23 D 3 24 GS1 128 uses a series of Application Identifiers to include additional data such as best before dates batch numbers quantities weights and many other attributes needed by the user EAN UCC 128 Emulation The options in this parameter allow you to turn this emulation on or off or to enable RSS Emulation Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 2435 TLC 39 This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details PDF 417 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable PDF 417 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a
77. need to install a special trigger back plate before following these steps to attach the pistol grip Refer to The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip on page 176 for details T WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 175 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip Note Prior to installation make sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly e Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the holes in the pisto PRO grip are aligned with the threaded inserts on the back of the WORKABOUT Tighten the screws to a torque of 3 Ibs in 3kgf cm to secure the pistol grip in place 6 4 The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip The Trigger Back Plate kit model number WA9300 provides a special back plate that incor porates a scanner interface board and a switch along with a Flush Mount Pistol Grip model number WA6103 The trigger back plate PN 1052211 and Flush Mount Pistol Grip are compatible with the following imager model numbers WA9113 G1 WA9103 G1 WA9112 G1 and WA9102 G1 Note that the Flush Mount Pistol Grip is also compatible with the WA9009 1D auto ranging laser scanner however this scanner is shipped with its own unique trigger back plate spe cially designed to interface with the Flu
78. not possible to read normal EAN 128 Codes FNC1 Conversion FNC1 Conversion allows the embedded FNC1 character to be converted to another char acter for applications that cannot use the default lt GS gt Group Separator or hex 1d Double tapping on this option displays a dialog box listing the allowable range 0 to 255 Enable ISBT 128 To successfully scan this type of bar code International Society of Blood Transfusion this option must be set to on If you enable this type of bar code Code 128 EAN 128 is deacti vated to avoid any confusion ISBT Concat Transmit The codes are not concatenated by default You need to choose one of the options provided for this parameter to send concatenated code Choosing Only Concatenated Codes transmits only concatenated codes single codes will not be transmitted Choosing Concatenated or WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 45 Appendix D Bar Code Settings EAN 13 EN D 4 5 Single transmits single codes or concatenated codes If only one code of a pair is read that code will be transmitted as a single code If both codes in a pair are detected they will be concatenated provided that ISBT Concat Any Pair see below is enabled ISBT Concat Any Pair Enabling this parameter causes all code pairs that can be to be concatenated even if they do not comply with Section 4 1 of the ISBT 128 Bar Code Symbology and Application Speci fication for Labeling of Whole
79. not specified in the profile when the radio tries to associate using that profile you will be prompted to enter the credentials WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual C 5 Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU ThirdPartyConfig e When prompted you can enter valid credentials enter invalid credentials or cancel the operation Ifyou enter valid credentials and tap OK the radio will associate and authenticate Ifyou enter invalid credentials and tap on OK the radio will associate but will not authenticate you will be prompted again to enter credentials Ifyou tap on Cancel or clear the credentials fields and tap on OK the radio will not attempt to associate with that profile until you perform one of the following actions while the profile is the active profile i Cause the WORKABOUT PRO to go through a power cycle or suspend resume ii Disable and enable the radio or tap the Reconnect button on the Diags windows iii Modify the profile and tap on Commit Alternatively you can choose another profile as the active profile and then switch back to the profile for which EAP authentication was cancelled C 3 4 ThirdPartyConfig If you choose to configure ThirdPartyConfig the SCU will work with the operating system Windows Zero Config WZC to configure radio and security settings for the CF radio in stalled in the unit Choosing this profile means that WZC must be used to define the following radio and secu
80. on Each time you press a numeric key from 2 through 9 an alpha character will be dis played on the screen Remember that you can refer to the taskbar for a visual indication of which alpha key will be displayed on the screen Important Once you have finished typing alpha characters remember to turn off or unlock the FN ORANGE key The Keypad Backlight The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is acti vated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows CE 5 0 Control Panel The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialog box Refer to Keyboard Backlight on page 99 for details about this option Note Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only The Display WORKABOUT PROS are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibil ity in low light conditions The backlight switches on when a key is pressed or the screen is tapped Adjusting the Display Backlight The Display Properties dialog box in the Control Panel allows you to determine the behav iour of the display backlight and its intensity Refer to Display Backlight on page 95 for details about the Display Properties dialog box 50 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 3 5 2 3 6 3 6 1 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Calibrating the Touchscreen Calibrating the Touchscreen If your WORKABOUT PRO t
81. on the Edit button Symbology Settings ok Preset Custom preset E All 1D With Strong Recovery H 2D Aztec Code 39 Code 128 E EAN 13 E EAN 8 OA To change a setting press space or double click Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change For a parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed Enter value from O to 157 il msec Type a value in the field provided For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes E 10 WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 4 6 E 4 7 E 4 8 E 4 9 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Removing a Custom Preset Removing a Custom Preset e Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is
82. one on the right side of the unit along with a scan bar just below the WORKABOUT PRO display For units that do not have internal scanners this key can be re mapped to another function Volume Keys UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW The volume keys are located above the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW The UP ARROW key the increase volume key is labelled with a plus symbol y The DOWN ARROW key the decrease volume key is labelled with a minus symbol Y Function Keys and Macro Keys In addition to the standard keyboard functions the WORKABOUT PRO supports Func tion keys and Macro keys All Function and Macro keys can be custom defined for each application Function Keys With the exception of the QWERTY keyboard which has 10 function keys the WORK ABOUT PRO keyboard is equipped with a total of 14 function keys On the alpha and numeric keyboards function keys F1 to F4 are located across the top of the keyboard to the left a right of the Scan key these function keys are directly accessible a key combina tion is not required Ten additional function keys are colour coded in blue print on the unit WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 47 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Alpha Keyboard Accessing Keys 3 4 3 2 A 3 4 4 3 4 5 body these keys are accessed by executing a key combination FN BLUE followed by the appropriate key For example to access function key F7 on a numeri
83. power supply Built in charger Rechargeable user replaceable backup battery pack Environmental e Withstands 26 drops on 12 edges 8 corners 6 faces at 5 ft 1 5 meters to polished con crete while powered on and configured with accessories such as CF radio scanner imager and pistol grip Rain Dust IP65 IEC 60529 Operating Temperature 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 50 C 5 95 RH non condensing Storage Temperature 40 F to 140 F 40 C to 60 C Physical Dimensions And Weight e e e e e WORKABOUT PRO C 8 775 in x 2 95 3 94 in x 1 22 1 65 in 223 mm x 75 100 mm x 31 42 mm WORKABOUT PRO s 7 87 in x 2 95 3 94 in x 1 22 1 65 in 200 mm x 75 100 mm x 31 42 mm Weight w o battery pack 214 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 7 Specifications WORKABOUT PRO Specifications WORKABOUT PRO C 1 lbs 455 g WORKABOUT PRO S 859 lbs 390 g Power Accessories AC power supply charge amp operate hand held e Automotive power supply charge amp operate hand held Single and Quad slot battery pack chargers e Powered cradle for vehicle mount applications Communication Accessories e Quad Dock 4 site with 10 100 BaseT Ethernet and charge functions Desktop Docking Station charges hand held amp spare battery provides USB1 1 host and device ports and supports optional plug on expansion modules supporting 10 100 BaseT Ethernet or RS232 connections USB ca
84. press the FN ORANGE key twice to lock it on Refer to Keyboard One Shots Mode on page 100 for details To choose the second letter in the sequence in this example the letter b Lock the FN ORANGE key on ORG KEY is displayed in upper case characters in the taskbar to indicate that this key is locked on Press numeric key 2 twice to display the letter b To choose the third letter in the sequence in this example the letter c Lock the FN ORANGE key on e Press numeric key 2 three times to display the letter c Note Keep in mind that there is a timeout ifyou pause for one second between key presses when selecting the second third or fourth letters on a key For example suppose you want to type the letter c you d need to press the 2 key three times With the EN ORANGE key locked on if you press 2 twice and then pause between key presses for 1 second the letter b will be selected automatically WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 49 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO The Keypad Backlight AA A 3 4 7 3 5 3 5 1 Creating Uppercase Letters To display an uppercase capital letter e Press the FN ORANGE key and then the SHIFT key before typing the alpha character Note If you want to use uppercase characters at all times press the SHIFT key twice to lock it on Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters Lock the FN ORANGE key
85. psionteklogix com warranty If you are not already a member of Teknet and you attempt to view this warranty you will be asked to register As a member of Teknet you will have access to helpful information about your Psion Teklogix products at no charge to you In some regions this warranty may exceed this period Please contact your local Psion Teklogix office for details The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with altered or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization See Psion Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details Important Psion Teklogix warranties take effect on the date of shipment Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete accurate and up to date In ad dition changes are periodically added to the information herein these changes will be incor porated into new editions of the publication Psion Teklogix Inc reserves the right to make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this doc ument without notice and shall not be responsible for any damages including but not limited to consequential damages caused by reliance on the material presented including but not limited to typographical errors TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 About This Mammalia sau a eka us bb abe ence nnew ed ove es ee 3 1
86. rules in sequential order Only one case will be applied to a bar code and a case will only be applied 150 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Translations Tab if all rules specified in the case are successful if a rule within a case fails the entire case fails Scanner Settings ok x Translations Case 2 empty Case 3 empty Case 4 empty Case 5 empty Case 6 empty Case 7 empty Case 8 empty Case 9 empty Case 10 empty To change a setting press space or double click Soc Mim In the Translation tab tap on the Case to create rules No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule Case 2 empty x To change a setting press space or double click RRE FREA gt WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 151 Chapter 5 Configuration Translations Tab Tap on the No rule drop down menu to display the rules Rule definition Rule definition fee Verify n Add barcode prefix suffix Action Verify barcode size Search and replace No rule defined No rule defined all S us 3714 E EXEFEEJZ When you choose a rule an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule Action must be found at specified index Insert Key El 8 45 3 4
87. scan beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code including the margins on either end of the symbol If you are using a 2D imaging scanner make certain the red oval shaped framing mark is centered within the bar code you want to scan When using imaging scanners do not move the scanner while decoding the bar code Movement blurs the image Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 205 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Troubleshooting 6 28 2 6 28 3 A 206 e Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan While the scanner beam is active the onscreen message states SCANNING If you want to turn off the onscreen message disable Scan Indication in the Options tab of the Scanner Settings menu in the Control Panel When the scan is successful the bar code data is displayed on the screen until the scan button or pistol trigger is released but only if Scan Result is turned on in the Options tab of the Scanner Settings menu in the Control Panel Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working investigate the following e e e e Is the unit on Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand held you are using Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code Check the bar code to make s
88. so on the hand held uses the value assigned in the Suspend Timeout field to determine when the unit will go to sleep appear to be off When the time in the Suspend Timeout field elapses without any activity the unit enters suspend state In suspend state the WORKABOUT PRO CPU enters a sleep state and the radio is shut off The state of the device RAM contents is preserved Pressing ENTER wakes the system from suspend state When the WORKABOUT PRO is in suspend state the network connection will not be broken immediately If the connection is dropped you must re establish the network connection 5 5 5 3 Suspend Threshold 112 The Suspend Threshold tab allows you to determine the amount of battery power that you want to reserve in the main battery to protect the data stored in the WORKABOUT PRO Power Properties Suspend Threshold advanced be gt Suspend threshold Maximize Maximize operating backup time time Main battery status Good Estimated battery backup time St ay If left at the default value Maximum Operating Time the hand held will run until the battery power is completely depleted the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time If you choose Maximum Backup Time the hand held shuts off with more power left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Power Management Properties
89. so that you can view the parameter settings Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change For a parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed Enter value from 0 to 157 a Te Type a value in the field provided For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes Removing a Custom Preset e Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 7 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets E 4 E 4 1 Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets To configure the bar code decoding camera presets e Tap on Start g
90. the Battery Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40 of capacity They must be fully charged prior to use Keep in mind also that along with the main battery the WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with an internal backup battery that preserves data stored on the unit while the main battery is swapped A Important The backup battery is trickle charged from the main battery To maximize battery life avoid excessive discharging and recharging of the backup battery by keeping the main battery fully charged IF YOU ARE POWERING UP A NEW UNIT a warning message may appear on the screen indicating that the backup battery capacity is low To recharge the backup battery you must fully charge the WORKABOUT PRO with the main battery installed in the unit 3 2 3 1 Chargers and Docking Stations AN Important FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about chargers and docking stations refer to Peripheral Devices amp Accessories on page 169 Lithium Ion battery packs must be charged before use These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations These include e AC wall adaptor Model PS1050 G1 operates as an AC power source and when plugged in also charges the battery installed in the unit Desktop Docking Station Model WA4003 G2 operates as both a charger and a docking station Operating as a charger both the battery installed in the hand held and a spare battery can be charged simultane
91. the Scanner ooa a 30 2 7 Connecting the WORKABOUT PRO toa PC o 30 2 8 Data Transfer Between the PC amp the Hand Held 31 2 8 1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync 2 2 ee ee ee 31 2 8 2 Using Microsoft Vista o o o 31 2 9 Voice Using the Phone Dialer 2 2 2 oo o 31 2 9 1 Dialing a Number o 32 2LO Voice MEM A e da ias 33 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 9 10 2 11 File Menu Phonebook Management 00000 pees 2 12 Resetting the Hand Held 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 o 2 12 1 Performing a Warm Reset o o o o e e 2 12 2 Performing a Cold Reset 2 aaa oo e WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 A EL 2 1 2 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Preparing the WORKABOUT PRO for Operation Preparing the WORKABOUT PRO for Operation The Main Battery Before charging the battery it is critical that you review the battery safety guidelines in the WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held Computer Warranty amp Regulatory Guide PN 8000126 The WORKABOUT PRO C and WORKABOUT PRO S can be powered with one of the following lithium ion battery packs e High Capacity Model No WA3006 and e Super High Capacity Model No WA3010 Charging the Main Battery Important Before opening the battery cover on your WORKABOUT PRO press the Power button to turn off the hand held
92. the internal power the switch is located inside the battery compartment Loosen the four screws securing the end cap and remove the end cap Unlatch the two connectors on the interface board on the new back plate Figure 6 1 e J1 J2 Position the lower end of the new back plate next to the back opening of the unit Insert the flex cable from the end cap into J2 on the interface board The contacts on the flex cable face towards the interface board WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 177 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip Tape e Latch the connector Flip the back plate upwards Insert the flex cable from the WORKABOUT PRO main logic board into J1 on the interface board The contacts on the flex cable face towards the interface board e Latch the connectors e Cut the Kapton tape square provided in two equal pieces e Remove the Kapton tape from the release liner Apply one piece over the end of the flex cable and the imager s flex connector Apply the other piece over the other end of the flex cable and the back plate flex connector as shown in Figure 6 1 This secures the flex cable at both ends Turn the back plate over 178 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip e Fasten t
93. to connect and then choose the Configure button to display the Device Properties dialog box WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 127 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection The WORKABOUT PRO communicates via Bluetooth to your Bluetooth equipped cellu lar telephone and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties dialog box The WORKABOUT PRO then disconnects Device Properties Port Settings Connection Preferences Baud Rate EE y Data Bits le y Parity None y Stop Bits fu y Elow Control Hardware y Terminal J Use terminal window before dialing C Use terminal window after dialing J Manual Dial 9 Under the Call Options tab turn off Cancel the call if not connected within and press ENTER to save your changes Device Properties ok x Port Settings Call Options fiz0 seconds M Wait for dial tone before dialing Wait for credit card lo sec Extra Settings Special modem commands may be inserted into the dial string A 128 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection 10 In the Modem dialog box choose the Next button to display the Phone Number dialog box Phone Number x Al GPRS Network Country code Area code 425 Phone number 1 Eorce long distance C Force local The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent Once you ve spec
94. we poe Aes ele AA ee 125 5 6 6 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection o 126 5 7 Certificate Assignment 2 130 5 3 COM Port Manager ic alk ek ee e ald et WPA ae 131 5 9 Dr Debug E Ay Sada aw aS A 132 Dl UALS da Be sth eae chee ae kee oh ae wae cere ee ae a 132 DISENO a Ghee edd a Sad We a 133 5 9 3 Wtihties 65 naaa he ae Bes Gee eb eee ce Bae 133 5 10 Error Reporting Vault aw ae es el a ee oa a is 134 Sl Intemet Options s ici Seay a weed me ee eb ad id Awa ete He 134 SLZ IPVO Supports si a eel e A a Bo a le ew ed 135 5 13 Manage TUES crobo ea ea e el e a A E A E a e a 135 5 13 1 Trigger Mappings 2 a 136 5 13 2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping oaa 138 5 14 Storage Manageri A A es A te ee es WU 140 5 14 1 Formatting a Memory Card 2 oo o o 140 5 14 2 Creating Partitions 141 5 14 3 Partition Properties soso ws o aoi A a Lk E 142 5 15 Teklogix Imagers Settings ee ee 144 5 16 Teklogix Scanner Settings o o o 146 5 16 1 The Scanner Meios di a ok a e ie 146 5 16 2 Restoring Default Settings 2 o oo e 147 SO S3OpuOns i eiar urea wl ee Beka os PER Ee a eI Ps 148 5 16 3 1 Double Click Parameters 2 2 2 2 022 020 ee 148 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 16 3 2 Display Parameters o o e e 149 5 16 3 3 Data Handling 150 5 16 4 Translations Tab
95. with Bluetooth The WORKABOUT PRO communicates via Bluetooth to the cell phone which then accesses a WAN Wide Area Network and transfers data using GPRS 1 Enable the Dial Up Networking service in the cell phone 2 Make the phone discoverable 3 Pair the phone service with the WORKABOUT PRO Dial Up Networking service using the Bluetooth Manager For instructions on pairing devices refer to Pairing a Device on page 122 4 To set up the internet parameters choose the Network And Dial up Connections icon from the Control Panel e Network and Dial u 5 Tap on the Make New Connection A ey ECOS101 126 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection 6 Inthe Make New Connection dialog box choose Dial Up Connection Enter a name for your GPRS network connection File Edit Advanced Make New Connection x Type a name for the connection oprs Network Select the connection type Dial Up Connection O Direct Connection O Virtual Private Network O Virtual Private Network L2TP PPP over Ethernet PPPoE 7 Choose the Next button to display the Modem dialog box Al GPRS Network Select a modem Hayes Compatible on COM1 Bluetooth Configure TCP IP Settings Security Settings lt Back Next gt 8 Inthe drop down menu labelled Select a modem choose the name of the modem with which you want
96. 0 Read write range up to 3 15 in 80 mm MIFARE module Frequency 13 56 MHz Tags supported ISO 14443 A amp B Mifare Read write range up to 1 97 in 50 mm LF module Frequency 125 KHz 134 2 KHz Tags supported EM 4x0x EM 4x50 Hitag 1 amp 2 ISO HDXA amp FDXB Read write range up to 2 756 in 70 mm UHF module Frequency 868 MHz or 915 MHz Read range up to 4 92 ft 150 cm 915MHz and up to 2 62 ft 80 cm 868 MHz Tag supported EPC Class 1 Gen 2 other protocols depending on regions AN Note All expansion modules are available factory configured or user installable User Interface e Color Touch Screen Display 3 6 in 9 144 cm diagonal Full VGA 480 x 640 resolution Transflective portrait mode TFT Adjustable Backlight Sunlight readable for outdoor use High reliability LED backlight Touchscreen standard 212 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 7 Specifications WORKABOUT PRO Specifications Passive stylus or finger operation Signature capture Keyboards Full Alpha Numeric C model Numeric S model Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous one hand operation Backlit high durability hard capped keys Indicators And Controls LED indicates battery charge status Audio 90 db mono speaker Mono microphone 86 db beeper Programming Environment e e e e e e Psion Teklogix Mobile Devices SDK HTML XML Hardware Development Kit HDK NET and C programmi
97. 0 Contents Soft Shell Holst atado 181 The Batteries Ir wineiagann gagging Sena n meee soe ERER ROE 182 6 7 1 Secure Battery Cover 00 cece cece cee cee ene e een eee eeeneeeneeeees 182 Adaptor Cable Opt ons is hiran EEn cielnnns guna Rp SEAR ER oe 185 Chargers and Docking Stations 0 0 ccc ccee ccc e eee e cence eee e rr 185 6 9 1 Installation Chargers and Docking Stations 0 cece ee eeee cece ees 185 6 9 2 Power Consumption Considerations 0000 cece cee e cece eee e serrer 186 6 9 3 Operator Controls ooroo aee eea 522 bbb RELAE SOAS SASS SESE SESE os 186 6 9 4 Important Charger Safety Instructions 00 cece ence eect ee eee eees 186 Desktop Docking Station 0 0 ccc cece cece dira NEEE EOE 187 6 10 1 Charging a Battery Installed in the WORKABOUT PRO 6 0005 189 6 10 2 Charging a Spare Battery 0 c cece cece eee e eee e eee ee nett rres 189 6 10 3 Battery Charge Duration 00 cece cece e eee e eee rr rr rr 190 6 10 4 Charger LED Indicators 0 c cece eect rr rr 190 Troubleshooting the Charging Operation of the Dock cece eee ee ene ee ees 190 Linking a WORKABOUT PRO to a PC iossc 2 cogsodedfccencencescusamreersees wie 190 Linking a WORKABOUT PRO to an Ethernet Network 0 0 0 cccceeee seen 191 613 1 Network Actes ocio iia 191 Troubleshooting the Docking Station Operati0NS ooooccccocccccccccco
98. 0 Note In order to access many of the menus discussed in this chapter the security level must be set to Supervisor see Security Settings on page 73 Graphic user interfaces like Windows CE 5 0 for portable devices and desktop Windows 2000 XP etc utilize point and click navigation An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every point and click action Windows CE 5 0 supports the same point and click user interface and keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference the point and click action is accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus Note If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately the touchscreen may need recalibration Refer to Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 51 Each WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a stylus a pointing tool that looks like a pen stored in a slot at the top of the unit The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen Note To prevent damage to the touchscreen use only the stylus pen supplied with your WORKABOUT PRO To choose an icon open a file launch an applet or open a folder Double tap the stylus on the appropriate icon Navigating Using the Keyboard If your WORKABOUT PRO touchscreen has been disabled you can use the keyboard to choose i
99. 0 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar Start Stop Transmit Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters a b c d A B C D a b c d t n e DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 Thus when a set is chosen the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be one of those characters and the body of the message should not contain these characters Setting this parameter to off strips the start and stop characters from this bar code Check Char When this parameter is set to Validate only the integrity of a Code 39 symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms If Check Char is set to Validate and Transmit the check character is validated and trans mitted with the data Setting this parameter to None disables this function Concatenation Codabar supports symbol concatenation When you enable Concatenation the imager looks for a Codabar symbol with a D start character that is adjacent to a symbol with a WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 27 Appendix D Bar Code Settings MSI Plessey D 3 13 D stop character In this case the two messages are concatenated into one with the D characters omitted Minimum And Maximum Length The length of
100. 04 G2 amp WA4304 G2 000 198 6 19 1 Quad Docking Station Setup ee 198 6 19 2 Quad Indicators o oo a 199 6 19 3 Inserting a WORKABOUT PRO in the Quad Docking Station 199 6 19 4 Network Access 2 ee 199 6 19 4 1 Network Addressing o o e 0000 4 199 6 19 5 Battery Charging LED Behaviour o 200 6 19 6 Troubleshooting o o o e 200 6 19 6 1 Network Link Unsuccessful o 200 6 19 6 2 Hand Held LED Does Not Light When Docked 200 6 20 The Vehicle Cradle ot ic Set Bg eh a Eee he des 200 6 20 1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations 201 6 21 Mounting Template 2 ee 202 6 22 Warm Guidelines id a eek eda eS 202 6 23 Using the Vehicle Cradle o ona aaa eee 202 6 24 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle 2 2 2 2 ee ee 202 6 25 Powered Cradle Installation in High Voltage Vehicles 202 6 26 Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation 203 6 26 1 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle o 203 6 27 The Port Replicator o aoaaa 204 6 28 Scanners andImagers e 204 6 28 1 Scanning Techniques ooa ee 205 170 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 6 28 2 Troubleshooting ees s nei eee ee Ge E a a eR ae he A 206 6 28 3 Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners 206 6 28 4 Operating Two Dime
101. 1 The k M Enable 802 1X authentication EAP type rus h Properties d automatically Network Name SSID e Type the appropriate SSID Service Set Identifier in the Network name SSID text entry field at the top of this dialog box The Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network Important Keep in mind that the WORKABOUT PRO will only communicate with access points that are configured with the same SSID Ad Hoc Infrastructure If you are using an 4d Hoc network one in which hand held computers pass data directly to other hand helds without an access point tap on the checkbox next to This is an ad hoc network to add a checkmark enabling Ad Hoc If you are using an Infrastructure network one in which WORKABOUT PRO must pass data through an access point leave the checkbox next to This is an ad hoc network blank Encryption The Encryption menu allows you to choose the type of encryption that will be used to protect transmitted data Only the Encryption options that are compatible with the type of Authentication you ve chosen will be listed e Choose an Encryption method valid for your network from the drop down menu WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 17 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring the 802 11a b g RA2043 Compact Flash Radio 18 WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption is only available whe
102. 120 24 70 reflective 48 200 40 100 reflective 60 240 48 238 High quality symbols in normal room light WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 7 Specifications SE1524ER Scanner Specifications 7 5 1 3 SE 955HP Decode Zone Decode Zone Typical 4 mil 1 0 in 5 5 in 2 54 cm 13 97 cm 5 mil 1 25 in 8 in 3 18 cm 20 32 cm 7 5 mil 1 5 in 13 25 in 3 81 cm 33 66 cm 10 mil 1 5 in 17 5 in 3 81 cm 44 45 cm UPC 100 1 5 in 23 5 in 3 81 cm 59 69 cm 15 mil 1 5 in 29 5 in 3 81 cm 74 93 cm 20 mil 1 75 in 35 5 in 4 45 cm 90 17 cm 40 mil 40 in 101 6 cm 55 mil 55 in 139 7 cm dependent on width of bar code 7 5 2 SE1524ER Scanner Specifications Parameter SE1524ER Light Source Laser 650nm Programmable Parameters Laser on time Aim duration Power mode Trigger mode Bi directional redundancy Symbology types lengths Data formatting Serial parameters Beeper tone Scan angle Scan Angle 13 5 0 7 Scan Pattern Single line Scan Rate 35 5 scans sec bi directional Technology Laser WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 239 Chapter 7 Specifications SE1524ER Scanner Specifications 240 Parameter SE1524ER Undecoded Decoded only Ambient light immunity Artificial 450 ft candles 4 844 Lux Sunlight 4 000 ft candles 86 112 Lux Hu
103. 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 2 12 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 93 Security Level This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge to edge UPC EAN bar codes Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose a level from 0 to 3 Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code Linear Decode Linear Decode applies to code types containing two adjacent blocks e g UPC A EAN 8 EAN 13 When enabled set to on a bar code is transmitted only when both the left and right blocks are successfully decoded within one laser scan This option should be enabled when bar codes are in proximity to each other 2D UPC Half Block Stitching Setting this parameter to on enables UPC Half Block Stitching for the SE 3223 omnidirec tional engine only Code 93 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93 or off to disable it Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for Code 93 can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to dec
104. 2 in 10 2 in 8 8 in 13 0 in 19 3cm 22 9cm 33 5 cm 25 9 cm 22 4cm 33cm SF Working o 7a mi Ba Data i gS milok fee rtu Range ingar ariz 021 cm 6 near 033 cm 017 cm 019 cm 021 cm 025 cm Near 2 8 in 2 5 in 3 4 in 3 4 in 2 2 in 2 0 in 7 1cm 6 4cm 8 6cm 8 6cm 5 6cm 5 1cm Far 6 in 6 5 in 5 7 in 5 4 in 7 6 in 8 9 in 15 2cm 16 5cm 14 5cm 13 7cm 19 3cm 22 6cm Data characterized at 23 C and 0 lux ambient light 246 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual APPENDIX A PORT PINOUTS A 1 LIF Low Insertion Force Port Pinout PIN Signal Name Ground 2 Ground 3 USB Host Data Plus For connecting USB devices 4 USB Host Data Minus For connecting USB Devices 5 USB Host Power for powering USB devices 5V 100mA Max 6 DC Power in for supplying power to WORKABOUT PRO charging battery 5V 3A 7 DC Power in for supplying power to WORKABOUT PRO charging battery 5V 3A 8 LIF Detect determines if a device is attached to the LIF 9 USB Device Data Minus for operating the WORKABOUT PRO asa USB device 10 USB Device Data Plus for operating the WORKABOUT PRO asa USB device 11 Ground 12 Ground WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix A Port Pinouts Tether Port Pinout A 2 Tether Port Pinout
105. 20 000002 eee 61 3 11 2 Cleaning The WORKABOUT PRO 2 000 61 40 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Features of the WORKABOUT PRO 3 1 Features of the WORKABOUT PRO Figure 3 1 Front of WORKABOUT PRO Speaker LED Microphone Light Emitting Diode Port WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 41 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO The Battery Figure 3 2 Back of WORKABOUT PRO Low Insert Point Port LIF DC IN Socket 3 2 The Battery The hand held operates with a Lithium Ion battery pack Preparing the unit for operation re quires that a battery pack be charged and installed in the WORKABOUT PRO 42 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 3 2 1 A 3 2 2 A 3 2 2 1 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Battery Safety Three levels of battery packs are available for the WORKABOUT PRO e High Capacity Model No WA3006 and e Super High Capacity Model No WA3010 Battery Safety Important Before attempting to install use or charge the battery pack it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference guide entitled WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000126 Removing the Battery Pack Important Always switch the unit off before opening the battery cover to remove the battery When the cover is rem
106. 3 15 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 11 these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allow able code lengths 4 to 48 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Code 11 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 11 Check Digits Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One Check Digit or Two check digits If this parameter is set to One Check Digit it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit If it is set to Two Check Digits it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Digit When this parameter is set to Validate only the integrity of a symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 29 Appendix D Bar Co
107. 3 LS Satety Licensee 0 a dj a id ate 225 7 3 1 6 Environmental Test 226 7 3 2 Super High Capacity Model WA3010 227 7 3 2 1 Electrical Specifications 227 7 3 2 2 Standard Discharge ee ee ee 229 7 3 2 3 Satety Data os omo ta A a 231 1 3 24 Safety License ah e al A ewe a 231 7 3 2 5 Environmental Test 232 73 3 Backup Battery iy ia E SAA A 233 7 3 3 1 Electrical Specifications 233 7 3 3 2 Battery Pack Electrical Specifications 234 133 3 Safety Dala e pita lo td a Sod we aes Vk a alee a 235 7 4 Scanner Imager Model Numbers 2 0 0 0 0 eee 235 7 5 Scanner Specifications 2 eee 236 7 5 1 SE1223HP LR and SE955HP Specifications 236 7 5 1 1 SE 1223HP Decode Zone 2 2 20 020004 238 7 5 1 2 SE 1223LR Decode Zone 2 2 2 20 0 00200 238 7 5 1 3 SE 955HP Decode Zone 239 7 5 2 SE1524ER Scanner Specifications 0 200005 239 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 209 7 5 2 1 SE1524 Scanner Decode Zone 004 241 7 5 3 EV15 Imager Specifications o ee 242 7 5 3 1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone 2 ee ee 243 7 5 4SX5400 Imager ee 243 7 5 4 1 SX5400 Imager Performance 244 T193 HHPSISOTmager oe vs on oe ie hw Rhee ate we Le Pate ee ee 245 7
108. 4 Rated Charge Current 1 5A Maximum 5 Charge Voltage 4 2 0 05V Maximum 6 Discharge Cut off voltage 2 6V Typical T Discharge Current Constant voltage Current limited 8 Discharge Current 0 5C 20 C to 60 C Typical 9 Internal Resistance 200 mo Maximum 7 3 1 2 Battery Pack Electrical Specifications Description Specification Minimum Typical Maximum Over voltage detection voltage 4 325V 4 350V 4 375V Charge enable 4 10V 4 15V 4 20V WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 221 Chapter 7 Specifications High Capacity Model WA3006 222 Description Specification Under voltage detection voltage 2 5V 2 6V 2 7V Over current detection current 3 5A Short circuit detection current 5 0A 8 0A 11 0A Short circuit detection voltage 150mV 200mV 250mV Over voltage delay time 0 8s Is 1 2s Under voltage delay time 90ms 100ms 110ms Over current delay time 5ms 10ms 20ms Short circuit delay time 160us 200us 240us Recovery charge current 0 5mA 1mA 2mA WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 7 3 1 3 Standard Discharge Chapter 7 Specifications High Capacity Model WA3006 Note Standard charge is defined as charging with constant voltage limit of 4 2V and con stant current limit of 0 94 the termination charge occurs when the current drops to 45mA Standard discharge is defined as discharging at a constant current of 350mA until the batter
109. 40 C at 90 RH for 240 hours No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage temp cycling Vibration resistance IEC68 2 14 Test BS2011 Part 2 1 FDC 1EC68 2 37 600C 2C for 1 hour T1 200C 2C for 1 hour 3 minutes Max allowed for change between T1 and T2 Cycle 10 times No explosion no fire no vent and no leakage After standard charge tested under the follow ing conditions Random vibration 5Hz 500Hz ASD 0 02g2 Hz in 3 axis for 15 mins After which carry out a standard discharge charge discharge No parting joints cracks or damage to connectors No leakage or critical damage Impact shock resist ance 3 cycles of 50G 11ms 1 2 sine pulse accelera tion applied in 6 directions 18 shocks total ESD protection Accordance with EN61000 4 8 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 7 3 2 7 3 2 1 Electrical Specifications Chapter 7 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 Super High Capacity Model WA3010 Note The electrical specifications apply for ambient temperature TAMB of 0 to 40 C unless otherwise stated Item Description Specification Remark 1 Interface Chipset Maxim DS2762 2 Rated Voltage 3 7V Typical 3 Rated Capacity 4400mAh Typical 4 Rated Charge Current 1 24 Maximum 5 Charge Voltage 4 2 0 05V Maximum 6 Discharge Cut Off Voltage 2 6V Typical 7 Charge Method Constant voltage Current limited 8 Discharge Cu
110. 5 DZS e Steet EN aiid CEC D 6 DAME Ace a II ALL od AAA aeRO D 9 DAT SEAN E O LELEL AA D 10 D 2 8 EAN 8 oett ANRA cee AAA AA ERTS MERA DADA Oecd D 10 D29 UPC A is D 11 P210 URGE rr IIS fa Waa aaa ONAN D 11 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Vii viii Contents D 3 D 2 11 UPC EAN Shared SettidgS 0oooocooooccooccncnncrrrnnrrrrrr rro D 12 D212 Code 93 recio Add dd dd dd dde D 13 D2413 Codi roo AAA D 14 D 2 14 MSI Plessy aid D 14 D 2 15 Interleaved ZO cri D 15 D 2 16 Discreto 201 ron LLL LL No D 16 D249 RSS Cod D 17 DIZE Composites ara EE acid sd dcdds AESA Aaaa D 18 D 2 119 BODEGA eee EEEEREOES D 18 D 2 20 Micro PDE 41 faccedtesnanacccccd E EEEE EEE EEA EEEE eels D 18 Decoded HHP ne 50 se 25555 dd Doi eee ae Fe D 19 D 3 1 Options Decoded HHP ccc cece ccc eee eee ee rr D 20 D 3 2 Advanced Options Decoded HHP 00 cc cece eee eee eeeeeenees D 20 DIS Code IA AA ARARA D 21 D34 Trioptic Code ccc 2c cccccccccc cece cc citan aa eee ate D 22 DIT Code lic o ENA D 23 Di36 FANII Settings td covww ewww ween PEELS LEERS E atah D 23 DIF EAN co D 24 D 3 8 URE A SUM tt TETEE EEEE eehh ekke eei D 25 DEI UPC ES Ma D 25 D 3 10 UPC EAN Shared Settings 0oooocoooocororcncrnccrrnrrrrrrrr raro D 26 DITA it D 26 D312 Codi bar AA ARS III Rea D 27 D 3 13 MSI Plessey conocio cotarro D 28 D314 Codi EEEE EEEE EEEE D 29 D3 15 Interleaved 2 iii cd D 29 DIAM Zor a A EES E IAAT AS
111. 5 16 4 1 Case Rules The case rules are defined as follows e No rule ignored e Match at index matches the match string at a specified index e Match and replace at index matches the match string at a specified index and replaces changes it e Replace at index replaces changes unspecified data in a given range Add barcode prefix suffix adds a global prefix or suffix 152 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Ports Tab Verify barcode size verifies the bar code size This rule should generally be assigned first before creating subsequent rules Search and replace replaces all instances of the match string Note that this rule cannot fail Note Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creating subsequent rules For example if the bar code size is important it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied Translation information about the status of each case rule is displayed in the scan log file see Scan Log File on page 149 when enabled This is useful if a case fails and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing 5 16 5 Ports Tab While you cannot configure the scanner you can configure communications with a serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab Scanner Settings ok x Barcodes Options Translations Ports Tether Port devic
112. 5 18 1 5 18 1 1 Chapter 5 Configuration Deleting a Profile Deleting a Profile Inthe Total Recall home screen tap on Delete Profile Inthe next screen locate your backup file and tap on OK A warning pop up screen appears asking if you re certain that you want to delete this file Tap on Yes to delete the file TweakIT Settings a wt TweakIT Settings This utility allows you to tweak or adjust Advanced system settings interface network servers driver and radio User settings Internet Explorer settings font size and docking port message and provides a Registry Editor Advanced CE Services Settings TweakIT Settings Advanced User Registry Editor M SCE Services Settings 1 FTP Server H 2 Interface and Network Setting m a Radio Features FTP Server This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers Keep in mind that data transfer in either direction is restricted to the Temp folder that is data are always loaded from the FTP Server to the Temp folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 163 Chapter 5 Configuration Advanced If this option is disabled a warm reset must be performed to accept the change 5 18 1 2 Interface and Network Settings TweakIT Settings Advanced User Registry Editor E a CE Services Settings meee Interface and Network Setting 1 Enable IPv6 2 Modem
113. 5 5 1 HHP5180 Imager Decode 2 2 2 2 ee ee eee 246 210 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 7 1 Chapter 7 Specifications WORKABOUT PRO Specifications WORKABOUT PRO Specifications En Note Performance specifications are nominal amp subject to change without notice Model Variants e WORKABOUT PRO C Model 7527C G2 WORKABOUT PRO S Model 75278 G2 Platform PXA270M 624 MHz 32 bit RISC CPU e 1024 MB Flash ROM 256 MB RAM Operating System e Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 Wireless Communication Optional expansion modules for 802 11b g Compact Flash Radio operating in the 2 4GHz band e 802 11a b g Compact Flash Radio with integrated antenna operating in 2 4GHz and 5GHz bands GSM GPRS EDGE via expansion interface Quad Band 850 900 1800 1900 Voice and Data e UMTS HSDPA via expansion interface Triple band 850 1900 2100MHz Voice and Data Integrated Bluetooth class II V 2 0 EDR NN Note 802 11b g GSM UMTS and Bluetooth are available simultaneously Bar Code Applications e Optional 1D imager expansion module Optional 2D imager expansion module Optional bolt on pistol grip EN Note All are user upgradeable WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 211 Chapter 7 Specifications WORKABOUT PRO Specifications RFID Modules e e e HF Module Frequency 13 56 MHz Tags supported ISO 15693 Philips ICode TI Tagilt Tagsys C210 C220 C240 C27
114. 6 11 6 12 Troubleshooting the Charging Operation of the Dock The quad battery charger troubleshooting section beginning on page 196 also applies to the charging behaviour of the desktop docking station Linking a WORKABOUT PRO to a PC The desktop docking station can be connected to a PC so that you can exchange files in the same way that you would between PC drives A USB cable is included with your docking station 190 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 6 13 6 13 1 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Linking a WORKABOUT PRO to an Ethernet Network Note For details about data transfer through Windows XP and ActiveSync and through Vista refer to Data Transfer Between the PC amp the Hand Held on page 31 To link the WORKABOUT PRO to a PC Insert the hand held in the desktop docking station Insert the USB cable into the docking station Client USB connector Attach the other end of the cable to a USB port on the PC Linking a WORKABOUT PRO to an Ethernet Network An USB Ethernet cae ae cable model number WA4010 G1 is used to connect the WORKABOUT PRO to an Ethernet network through a desktop docking station Figure 6 5 USB Ethernet Adaptor Cable Ethernet Port USB Connector Insert the adaptor s USB connector into the Host USB port on the desktop docking station Connect your network Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the adaptor cable
115. 802 11 radio can be configured and an existing configuration can be executed Refer to Configuring the 802 11a b g RA2043 Compact Flash Radio on page 14 and Configuring the Summit RA2041 802 11b g on page 24 for details Owner Provides fields in which you can specify owner information A Notes tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up Network ID tab infor mation is used to access network resources This information should be provided by your System Administrator Password Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit Once assigned password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your pass word and keep it in a safe place Refer to Security Settings on page 73 for details PC Connection Enables direct connections to a desktop computer Selecting the Change Connection button allows you to change the type of direct connect to your PC Power Displays battery pack power status Alternately battery status can be accessed through the taskbar Additional tabs allow you to determine suspend states specify a suspend threshold and when seated in either the Combo Dock or Quad Dock determine whether or not a battery that requires it can be recalibrated This dialog box also allows you to activate card slots and built in devices Refer to Devices on page 114 for details 90 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0
116. ABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Bluetooth setup 117 GPRS setup 126 peripherals 208 Bluetooth specs 220 Bright For backlight 96 Built in Devices tab Power Properties 114 C cable diagrams A calibrating touchscreen 5 116 Calibration touchscreen 1 6 Call Lists 33 Call Management 35 case carrying 181 Case Rules bar code Translation tab 152 changing password Start Menu security 74 charger descriptions of 44 safety instructions 186 187 chargers 185 desktop docking station 187 installing at a site 185 operator controls 186 quad battery charger WA3004 195 single battery 194 charging main battery 11 Check Char 27 27 28 29 Check Digit 23 24 25 26 check digit D 15 29 Check Digit One D 5 29 Check Digits MSI Plessey D 5 29 Check Digit Verification D 8 D 44 D 46 D 51 D 52 D 54 Check Digit Verification Codabar D 50 Check Digit Verification I 2 of 5 D 16 cleaning hand held 6 Click Data scanner double click 148 Click Time scanner double click 48 CLSI Editing D 4 CLSI Library System D 50 Codabar D 14 27 D 50 Codabar D 14 Codablock 36 D 58 Code Page Default Local ASCH 750 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 750 code page Data Handling 150 Code 11 29 D 52 Code 128 D 9 23 D 45 Code 128 Emulation D 9 D 57 Code 16K 35 Code 32 Convert To D 7 Code 32 Prefix D 7 Code 39 D 6 21 D 43 Code 49 36 Code 93 D 13 26 D 49 Code 93 D 13 Command Prompt 75 communication Eth
117. AN Important Selecting Maximum backup time will reserve approximately 20 of the battery capacity for memory backup Once the battery is drained the system RAM memory is lost and the unit must cold boot In most real time transaction environments this is not a problem it only takes a few seconds to cold boot However batch transaction environments where data are not saved to a non volatile memory such as an SD FLASH card may need to pay particular attention to this parameter Psion Tek logix does not recommend the storage of any valuable data in system RAM The WORKABOUT PRO Windows CE 5 0 environment does not store any critical data in RAM such as the registry or file system If the operator s application does not save data to RAM Psion Teklogix rec ommends keeping the Suspend Threshold setting as low as possible to maximize battery run time 5 5 5 4 Advanced Power Properties jok x Suspend Threshold Advanced od al rAllow suspend with M Active TCP IP connection rLow power warnings Battery low power threshold H 10 V Enable battery warnings Eil PERTE Allow Suspend With This tab allows you to specify whether or not your unit will enter suspend state while it is operating with an active PPP connection an active network interface or an active TCP IP connection Low Power Warnings The sliding scale at the bottom ofthis tab allows you to specify the remai
118. Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN Note Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have roaming agreements Even when a network is listed with an Available status it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers GPRS A status of Forbidden indicates that the network cannot be used If you choose a network that is not covered by a roaming agreement the status in the main WWAN dialog box changes to Emergency calls only No network found GPRS not available or GPRS not allowed B 1 4 4 Driver Mode Configuration B 12 WWAN Driver Mode OK x M M Enable automatic port detection PA Select port Built in GPRS moder By default the Wireless WAN driver is enabled the Enable driver checkbox is checked The driver must be disabled in order to use the modem for anything other than GPRS e g dial up data fax or in order to manually submit AT commands to the modem for develop ment testing approvals etc If the Enable driver checkbox is not checked the driver is shut down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box is chosen If on the other hand the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver check box is checked the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is closed using the OK button Note When the driver is not running no net
119. Blood and Blood Components June 2000 Version 1 2 1 Reading Range Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned The default setting Extended allows for increased reading distance Check Digit Verification The available options for this parameter are Disabled or French CIP This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted Note French CIP French pharmaceutical is only used with bar codes containing 7 characters Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details EAN 13 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 ISBN Conversion When this parameter International Standard Book Number is enabled the first 3 characters 978 are ignored and the checksum 0 9 X is calculated on the remaining characters D 46 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 4 6 D 4 7 Appendix D Bar Code Settings EAN 8 Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be e
120. Code Settings Code 39 D 2 5 E Scan Data Format This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format Double tapping on Scan Data Format displays the following options from which you can choose a data format data as 1s data S1 data S2 data S1 S2 P data P data S1 P data S2 and P data S1 S2 Prefix P Suffix S1 And Suffix S2 A prefix and or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing When you double tap on these parameters a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 255 Delete Char Set ECls Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing Character Set ECIs Extended Channel Interpretations also known as GLIs from its buffer before transmission When this parameter is enabled the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417 bar codes containing Character Set ECIs even when the ECI Protocol is disabled ECI Decoder Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpre tations ECIs supported by the scanner This parameter has no effect on symbols that were not encoded using ECIs If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data Code 39 Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables Code 39 Enab
121. Configuration In the main Wireless WAN window Tap on the Tools menu and choose Network WWAN Network Manually select network Show available networks By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agreement You may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour For example you may want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available Abroad you may find that an available network does not have GPRS roaming agreements In this case you ll need to manually select the network which you know to support GPRS roaming Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking Enable auto matic network select in the Network dialog box When automatic network selection is disabled you must select a network manually Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings Scanning for avail able networks is a lengthy operation a progress bar is shown while the scan is active For every network that is found the network name country status and numeric network identifier MCC MNC Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code is displayed WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 11
122. D 30 Bisel IAEA 2 Of td D 30 D 3 18 Discreta D 31 DAE a I E EEEE o D 31 D 3 20 RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology s ssrsusesrerrsererrrsrr ses D 32 D 3 21 PosiCode Reduced Space Symbology 0 cece eeeee ee eeeeeeeeees D 33 D322 Composite c cecovsengdecsscdbuannnakhs cee Root bouseenen E aeons D 33 PERA ERES E D 34 D324 PDF A Td dd dd a D 34 D325 Micro POAT oI aaa aaa D 35 D326 Code 16K errr rara AAAA ARAARA A aa aaa TEKEE D 35 D827 RR RAR D 36 Di3 28 Codablockss 2 o aca D 36 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 4 Contents D329 2D Data Matt ses D 37 D330 2D OR COIE DAAI rene ea SA D 37 Di3 31 2D Maxicod 00 datada lalala D 37 D332 2D AAECIAAA ono rot aar descends picar rsa re dee mnereemeenien D 38 13333 Postal PlaANET 20 r urone nonn ireen a rn Baebbbebndebdig oe D 38 D 3 34 Postal PostNET na en EEEE NE o ELE LELE EERE D 39 1335 Postal Australian ad AL A ee 08 D 39 DIO Postal Cab D 39 13 37 Postal Cha iia D 40 D 3 38 Postal Japanese ci idas D 40 D339 POSTA A EA RAR AI Ai oben D 40 D 3 40 Postal Koread oooooocooccconoocnoocnnrn cnc D 41 D 3 41 Postal Royaluorioco cis aa D 41 Dr ee aaa D 42 D 4 1 Options Decoded Scanner 00 cece cence eee e eee e ee eneeeenees D 42 D 4 2 Advanced Options Decoded Scanner 00 cece eee eee eee eee eee ees D 42 DAZ Code dirias D 43 D442 COdE TI NN id adn D 45 DA EAN aa D 46 DA MEANS AA cnn ALL LLL do D 47
123. D 43 Check French CIP or Italian CIP Note French CIP French pharmaceutical is only used with bar codes containing 7 characters Italian CIP Italian pharmaceutical is also known as Code 32 It is transmitted as a standard Code 39 if checksum is not validated Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details D 44 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 4 4 A Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 128 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Code 128 Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables Code 128 GS1 128 GS1 128 is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification The former correct name was UCC EAN 128 GS1 128 Identifier GS1 128 Identifier allows the AIM ID C1 for EAN 128 to be transmitted or removed By default this identifier is transmitted if EAN 128 is enabled GTIN Compliant GTIN global trade item number processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14 character EAN UCC GTIN To use GTIN processing you must activate the EAN 128 symbology Important When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated it is
124. Duration 2 2 2 200002200 0 190 6 10 4 Charger LED Indicators 2 2 ee 190 6 11 Troubleshooting the Charging Operation of the Dock 190 6 12 Linking a WORKABOUT PRO to a PC 2 ee 190 6 13 Linking a WORKABOUT PRO to an Ethernet Network oo 191 6 13 1 NetworkAccEsSS3 u y a a a ee a ed me 191 6 14 Troubleshooting the Docking Station Operations 192 6 15 AC Wall Adaptor Model PS1050 G1 o o o o o omo o 192 6 16 Automotive Adaptor Model WA3113 G2 o o o o o 193 6 17 Single Battery Charger Model FWA3001 Gl o o o o o ooo 194 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 169 6 17 1 Inserting A Battery in the Single Battery Charger 194 6 17 2 Battery Charge Duration 2 2 0 oo e 194 6 17 3 Charge Indicators Single Battery Charge LED 194 6 18 Quad Battery Charger Model WA3004 G1 o o o o o o ooo 195 6 18 1 Charging Batteries 2 a 196 6 18 2 Battery Charge Duration 2 0 2 2 00 002002005 196 6 18 3 Charge Indicators The LEDS 204 196 6 18 4 Troubleshooting 2 ee 196 6 18 4 1 Excessive Charge Duration 000 196 6 18 4 2 Indicator Flashing Red 2 2 196 6 18 4 3 Power LED Does Not Light Up 197 6 18 4 4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed 197 6 19 Quad Docking Station WA42
125. G1 6 17 Single Battery Charger Model WA3001 G1 The single battery charger is designed to charge a single battery It has a DC IN socket and is equipped with one LED that indicates the status of the charge process 6 17 1 Inserting A Battery in the Single Battery Charger Insert the DC power plug into the charger Plug the pronged end of the power cable into an AC outlet Install the battery aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the battery charge well 6 17 2 Battery Charge Duration It can take up to 4 hours to fully charge a battery The single battery charger stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge well The 75 charge indicator is handy if you need a quick recharge a quick charge often takes less than one hour 6 17 3 Charge Indicators Single Battery Charge LED The LED on the top of the charger indicates battery charge progress Table 6 2 Single Battery Charger LED Behaviour LED Behaviour Charge Status Off No battery detected in the charge well Solid green Battery is fully charged 194 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Quad Battery Charger Model WA3004 G1 Table 6 2 Single Battery Charger LED Behaviour Fast flashing green Battery is charged to 75 of capacity Slow flashing green Charge in progress Sol
126. Glossy surface Predefined preset E 3 Good Scan Beep 749 GPRS Bluetooth 126 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Group preset E GSM GPRS B 1 B 17 GSM radio 217 GS1 128 D 45 GS1 128 Composite bar code 33 GS1 128 GS1 US D 9 GS1 128 Identifier D 45 GTIN Compliant D 45 D 49 H hand strap 173 headsets pairing Bluetooth 57 122 HHP parameters 19 high capacity battery pack WA3006 227 233 holster soft shell 181 I IATA 2of5 30 Identifier Default preset group E 2 IEEE radio configuring 14 Imager SX5400 specs 243 imager 2D scanner scanning 2D 207 imager options 204 Imager Settings 144 indicators battery gauge 54 dialer phone 55 docking devices 55 LED functions 5 modifier keys 53 onscreen 33 phone dialer 55 scanner message 206 207 security level 55 task bar 69 Wireless WAN 55 802 1 1radio signal quality 54 Infrastructure network 17 Input Panel control panel 89 integrated scanner option 204 Intensity Keyboard Backlight 100 Intensity 7035 backlighting 96 Interleaved 2 of 5 D 15 29 D 52 internal scanner decoded D 2 Internet Explorer 75 IP address assigning 20 IP address assigning Summit 24 ISBN Conversion 24 D 46 ISBT Concat Any Pair D 46 ISBT Concatenation 23 ISBT Concat Transmit D 45 ISBT 128 D 10 D 45 ISM band Bluetooth radio 117 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 code page 50 K keyboard alpha keyboard 48 key repeat 97 99 numeric 49 one sho
127. Logging H a Services Settings m a Radio Features Enable IPv6 This option allows you to enabled Internet Protocol specification version 6 that has been published to use 128 bit IP address replacing version 4 Modem Logging When this option is enabled the WORKABOUT PRO logs AT commands e g dial out information password string etc that the administrator can monitor for debugging pur poses Modem commands are stored in MdmLog txt 164 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 18 1 3 5 18 1 4 Services Settings TweakIT Settings Advanced User Registry Editor E 3 H a CE Services Settings 4 Interface and Network Setting ettings 1 SNTP Server H A Radio Features leasis SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol Server The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize WORKABOUT PRO time with the time server time A warm reset must be performed once the server name as been entered Radio Features TweakIT Settings Advanced User Registry Editor 1 CE Services Settings Interface and Network Setting Services Settings EPER Features 1 AP Density 2 Radio Power Managemer AP Density Chapter 5 Configuration Advanced This option allows you to determine the signal strength at which the WORKABOUT PRO radio will begin searching for a new Access Point AP High Medium or Low If
128. MTS Modem radio specifications 2 8 Reading Range D 44 D 46 D 49 D 52 recalibrating touchscreen 51 116 remote connect 87 Remote Desktop Connection 75 Repeat Delay between key repeats 98 Repeat Rate of key repeats 98 Repeat tab key repeat settings 97 resetting the WORKABOUT PRO warm reset 37 RSS Code D 17 32 D 55 Run Start Menu 79 S safety instructions battery charger 186 187 scanner 204 safety warning scanner 204 Same Read Timeout D 43 Same Read Validate D 43 Scan Angle D 5 Scan Data Format D 6 Scan Indicator 749 SCAN Key 47 Scan Log File 149 scanner one dimensional 1D internal scanner 206 safety warnings 204 techniques scanning 205 troubleshooting tips 206 two dimensional 2D imager scanner 207 Scanner menu 146 scanner module SE 955 specs 236 scanner options 204 Scanner settings bar codes 146 Scanner Settings applet Display parameters 149 scanning Aim Duration D 2 aiming target dot duration D 2 appending characters 148 Vill WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Bad Scan Beep 749 check digit D 15 29 Check Digits MSI Plessey D 5 29 Check Digit Verification D 8 Check Digit Verification I 2 of 5 D 16 Click Data appending data 148 Click Time 748 CESI Editing D 4 Codabar D 14 Code 128 D 9 23 D 45 Code 128 Emulation D 9 Code 32 Prefix D 7 Code 39 D 6 21 D 43 Code 93 D 13 Composite D 18 D 56 Conv UPC E To UPC A D 2 Conv UPC E1 To UPC A D 2 Con
129. NGE W To access 2 press FN ORANGE E and so on 48 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 3 4 6 A Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alphanumeric Keys Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alphanumeric Keys While numeric keys are directly accessible on the numeric keyboard all alpha characters are printed on the unit plastic in orange typeface above the numeric keys An indicator in the left comer of the taskbar displays the currently selected character To access an alpha character first press the FN ORANGE key and then press the numeric key above which the alpha character you want to type is printed Choosing a Single Alpha Character The examples below illustrate how to access A B and C all of which are printed in orange characters above the numeric key 2 Important The letters you choose appear in the taskbar providing a visual indicator of which letter will be displayed on the screen To choose the letter a Press the FN ORANGE key and press the numeric key 2 Note To choose the second third or fourth alpha character assigned to a numeric key you may want to lock the FN ORANGE key on When this key is locked on ORG KEY is displayed in upper case letters in the taskbar By default the FN ORANGE key is locked on when pressed once However depending on how your unit is set up in the One Shots tab you may find that you need to
130. PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 5 D 3 6 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 128 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Code 128 Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables Code 128 ISBT Concatenation These codes are not concatenated by default You need to set this parameter to on to send concatenated code Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 0 to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details EAN 13 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 Check Digit If you enable this parameter a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Addendum Add on 2 And Addendum Add on 5 An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or 5 characters WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 23 Appendix D Bar Code Settings EAN 8 D 3 7 Addendum Required When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not a
131. Protocol 17 TLC 39 34 D 56 Total Recall backup profile creating 138 backup profile restoring 161 view profile 62 touch pen using 65 touchscreen recalibration 51 116 stylus using 65 touch pen using 65 Translations parameters bar codes 150 Transmit Check Digit D 44 D 47 D 46 D 50 D 51 D 52 D 53 D 54 Transmit Check Digit 12 of 5 D 16 Transmit Check Digit MSI Plessey D 15 Transmit Code 1D Char D 5 Transmit Number System 25 26 D 47 D 48 trigger backplate kit installing 176 trigger mappings 36 Trigger On Sequence 155 157 Trigger Press Type Manage Triggers menu 139 triggers configuring 135 Trioptic Code 39 22 Trioptic Code 39 Enable D 6 troubleshooting tips scanning 206 TweakIT Advanced Services 65 Radio Features 65 TweakIT Settings Advanced Interface and Network 163 U UMTS modem radio 218 UPCA D 11 25 D 47 PC A Check Digit D PC A Preamble D PCE D 11 25 D 48 UPC EAN D 2 UPC EAN Shared Settings 26 D 48 UPC E Check Digit D UPC E Preamble D UPC E1 Check Digit D UPC E1 Preamble D UPC Half Block Stitching 2D D 3 USB Ethernet adaptor cable WA4010 191 User security level 73 Vv vehicle cradle 200 powered 10 55 VDC 200 powered 12 VDC 200 unpowered 200 Voice Call Lists 33 Call Management 35 conference calls 35 dialing a number 32 Phonebook 35 phone dialer 37 Services 34 Voice phone options 31 Voice options dialing a number 3 W Wa
132. RO Bluetooth Radio Note Refer to Desktop Docking Station on page 187 for more details The desktop docking station can complete batch uploads to a Client USB connected PC or server An optional 10 100baseT Ethernet module is also available Unlike the desktop docking station the quad docking station supports only TCP IP connec tions to a PC or server through a 10 100baseT Ethernet connection When a WORKABOUT PRO is properly inserted in a docking station a dock icon is dis played in the navigation bar at the top of the screen The unit also detects the presence of the Ethernet network Bluetooth Radio Note Integrated Bluetooth class II radios are standard on WORKABOUT PRO Cand S units Keep in mind also that Bluetooth is available simultaneously with WAN and 802 11g on a single unit The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with an on board Bluetooth radio This type of radio enables short range data communication between devices The Bluetooth also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone as a data modem exchanging informa tion with other Bluetooth devices and providing network access Refer to Bluetooth Setup on page 117 for setup details You can also pair your hand set with a Bluetooth headset Pairing a Bluetooth Headset or Other Bluetooth Device Note If the Bluetooth radio is not already enabled tap on the Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Tap on the Power icon and then the Built in De
133. Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details PDF 417 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable PDF 417 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Micro PDF 417 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Micro PDF 417 Code 128 Emulation When this parameter is enabled the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF 417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols If Code 128 Emulation is enabled the following Micro PDF 417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes C1 if the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 CO if the first codeword is 910 or 911 If Code 128 Emulation is set to off the Micro PDF 417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 57 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Codablock E3 if the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 JES if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 4 23 Codablock Enable Codablock A Set this parameter to on to enable Codablo
134. SCII character sequence or an equivalent Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active network key on the access point e WEP Enter either a 5 to 13 ASCII character sequence or a 10 to 26 Hexadecimal sequence WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK Enter an 8 to 63 ASCII character sequence or 64 Hexa decimal sequence network key If you are using WEP encryption you can choose to have the Network Key provided auto matically or to enter it manual e To enter the Network key manually uncheck the box to the left of The key is provided automatically WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring the 802 11a b g RA2043 Compact Flash Radio Figure 2 1 Accessing Network Key and Key Index Wireless Properties oK x Network name SSID This is an ad hoc network wireless access points are not used Encryption WEP Authentication Open y Disable this option to Network key IS access the Network Key amp Key Index fields Key index f Key Index This field is used to identify the WEP key Enter a value from 1 to 4 Enable 802 1x Authentication 802 1X is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks It pro vides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet network whether wired or wireless A security protocol packet such as TLS encapsulated in an EAP is used in conjunc tion with the 802 1X standard to authenticate u
135. SDCCF10G1 24 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Assigning the IP Address Figure 2 2 Summit WLAN Adapter Icon File Edit Advanced Make New 1 Smaa a incpi Connection The Summit WLAN Adapter Settings menu is displayed in this screen shown as the SDCCF10G1 menu Tap on the IP Information tab Figure 2 3 IP Information Tab SDCCF10G1 OK x Wireless Statistics Internet Protocol TCP IP Address Type DHCP IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway Renew Details Note Choosing the Renew button forces the WORKABOUT PRO to renew or find a new IP address This is useful if for example you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your WORKABOUT PRO is dropped from the network WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 25 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Name Servers Tab To define a static IP address tap on the Configure button The Summit WLAN Adapter Settings menu provides two options Tap on Obtain an IP address via DHCP to have an address assigned automatically or If you want to use a particular IP address tap on Specify an IP address and type the pre ferred address as well as the JP Subnet Mask and Default Gateway addresses in the appropriate fields Tap OK to save your information Summit WLAN Adapter Se OK lx IP Address Name Servers An IP address can
136. T PRO Tap on Yes and type the PIN When authentication is com plete tap on Done 122 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Device Tab After entering the device PIN the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for that device Services ok Device Name TORPSG 011 Select service for pairing Serial Port OBEX OPP Refresh Done Brasil e Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it e Click on Done Services that require more information present a configuration dialog box Serial Profile is an example Select profile options and press Next Encryption Mode Serial Port como To Cancel Next cal S 45i3 gt This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and se lecting three different modes Serial ActiveSync and Scanner e Serial is used for simple serial port communication e ActiveSync is for ActiveSync over Bluetooth WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 123 Chapter 5 Configuration Servers Tab 5 6 3 e Scanner is used to create a seamless connection between the incoming Bluetooth bar code and the WORKABOUT PRO Once you ve completed the information Tap on Next and then in the Services screen click on Done Servers Tab Bluetooth Paired Device Servers mode About Select a service to be enabled on this
137. Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon and then tap on the Translation tab PTS Imager Settings Barcoding Filter Translations Ad Case 2 empty Case 3 empty Case 4 empty Case 5 empty Case 6 empty Case 7 empty Case 8 empty Case 9 empty Case 10 empty ee E E E E E For instructions on adding editing and removing translation rules refer to the Translations Tab on page 150 E 16 WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 4 16 Advanced Tab E 4 16 1 File Locations for Captured Images Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Advanced Tab To configure the location for saved images open the dialog box as follows Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel PTS Imager Settings Filter Translations Advanced ab Imager Built in Service Trigg Max Number Barcodes File Location My Documents mel File Name ficsimg Load Defaults To define the location where imager files will be stored Tap on the File Location button Format ipg Sav ARE QA Application Data Pdbinfo Flash Disk Program File My Documents S SD MMC Care Temp gt e WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 2 fox bx Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon and then tap on the Advanced tab Choose the folder name and file Type Then enter the fi
138. To make a phone call all you need is the recipient s phone number Type the recipient s phone number in the phone number entry field Send button tap to dial the number you typed Backspace button tap to erase characters in the phone number entry field End button tap to disconnect the phone call Mute button During a phone call tap to mute sound transmission Tap again to restore sound button When making an international call the sign can be used as a universal substitute for any international dialing prefix and is guaranteed to work worldwide The entry sequence must be as follows country code followed by phone number Example A standard phone number 011 36 30 275 28466 using the substitution is typed as follows 36 30 275 28466 The symbol replaces the universal dialing prefix 011 32 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Voice Menu 2 10 Voice Menu This menu allows you to manage calls view your call history and if required assign a call forwarding service to your hand held Call Management Call Lists gt Disconnected fr _ Services 1 j2 3m D 45 55 Ey CE Ts gw 9 ED J0 gt u 25 3 Call Lists Wireless WAN File s i Voice Number 5556661212 4175551212 1 ce r s Bruv Qor JS a 4 4 Add to phonebook J Z 9 49 B wl OF 902 149 B 5 wl OF
139. UT PRO toaPC ooooocococcccccncccococoncncocinoncnos 30 2 8 Data Transfer Between the PC amp the Hand Held oooocccccccccccccccncccccccnnnns 31 2 8 1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync oooooococccooccccnocnnnrrrr rr rrrr rro 31 2 8 2 Using Microsoft Vista ooooocooccocooccnnnrcrnrnrr rr 31 2 9 Voice Using the Phone Dialer 00 cece ccc eect cence tenn rr 31 291 Dialga Number seoses ts SETE EErEE ESE aaa 32 210 Voice Menu AAA AAA EDE DERTEN On IEA 33 2 11 File Menu Phonebook Management 00 cece cence eee eee rr rra 36 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual i ii Contents 2 12 Resetting the Hand Held exes AAA eens ecole 37 2 12 1 Performing a Warm Reset 00 cece eee ee ene PESEE EEE rr rro 37 2 12 2 Performing a Cold Reset ber ee eee ceed ce reece 38 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 11 Features of the WORKABOUT PRO 20 0 cccececececeececuccueeteeeueeeeeeeenss 41 The Battery eserine oso o o e es h55e 22555005 cias 42 321 Battery Safety aL 43 3 2 2 Removing the Battery Pack 00 cece eect e eect eee eee ee cee rro 43 3 2 3 Charging the Battery 05 dicta aaa abide ets 44 Switching the Hand Held On and Off 00 cece cece eee eee e rro 45 The Keyboard 4 42 nad 45 341 Modifier Keys ccc cc cccccc cece tirarla 45 SAD t The Keri Aaa 46 3 43 Function Keys and Ma
140. User Manual 59 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Inserting And Removing The Card A hinged door at the top of the battery compartment protects the connectors This door differs slightly depending on the type of unit you are using On the WORKABOUT PRO C a plastic SD MMC door is hinged on the left hand side of the unit If you are working with a WORKABOUT PRO S a metal door is hinged on the right hand side of the unit Ona WORKABOUT PRO C pull the hinged door down as the arrow icon on the door indicates Ona WORKABOUT PRO S pull the metal door upward to expose the SD MMC slots e Orient the SD MMC or SIM card according to the legend stamped into the battery well plastic e ForaSD MMC card slide the card into the lower slot pushing it inward until it latches into place e Fora SIM card slide the card into the upper slot pushing it inward until it latches into place Note that a label over the SIM opening needs to be removed before the card can be inserted only after a GSM UMTS radio is installed Ona WORKABOUT PRO C swing the hinged door back up into place and gently snap it shut On a WORKABOUT PRO S the metal SD door incorporates dimples that act as a locking feature Dimples Remo i f dla A f ER a HAS i Push the door down so the dimples fit into the slot cut into the battery compartment plastic To remove the card e Gently press the card inward until it unlatch
141. WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 5 0 Model No 7527C G2 amp 7527S G2 User Manual February 13 2010 Part No 8100196 A ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System TEKLOGIX Copyright 2010 by Psion Teklogix Inc Mississauga Ontario 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada LSN 7J9 http www psionteklogix com This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc is issued in strict confidence and is not to be reproduced or copied in whole or in part except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Psion Teklogix manufactured goods and ser vices Furthermore this document is not to be used as a basis for design manufacture or sub contract or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc WORKABOUT PRO is a trademark of Psion Teklogix Inc Windows and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries E Bluetooth The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Psion Teklogix Inc is under license All trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective holders Return To Factory Warranty Psion Teklogix Inc provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of twelve 12 months in accordance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability provided at www
142. a normal office lighting about 300 Lux Low light This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights are kept low or inside an unlit truck This preset increases either the exposure time or the gain Low power This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the hand held Glossy surface This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection This preset is used to read bar codes that are behind glass or inside the plastic window of an envelope WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 3 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Image Capture Predefined Presets E 2 4 Image Capture Predefined Presets The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions AN Note It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible E 3 E 3 1 Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions It is optimized for a normal office lighting about 300 Lux Motion This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion Low light near This preset is designed for dark conditions it uses a longer exposure time and includes the flash Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet Configuring the Image Capture Presets To configure the image capture presets open the dialog box as follows Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon and if it s not already
143. a setting press space or Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change For a parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed Enter value from O to 127 fi chars Type a value in the field provided For a parameter that takes a single character WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 15 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Translation Tab Configuring Rules Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter The following screen is displayed Prefix Char Press the Key to Insert Press ESC for the default value e When you ve completed your edits tap on OK E 4 15 Translation Tab Configuring Rules Translation rules enable the automatic processing of bar code data Up to 10 cases can be de fined each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules Note Changes made to the translations configuration using the Teklogix Scanner Con trol Panel program are synchronized with changes made here Changes made in either place affect both translation tables Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel
144. a warm reset the operating system restarts without clearing the object store memory where the file system resides Registry settings installed programs and any data files are preserved Any open applications are closed and any unsaved data are lost Refer to Performing a Warm Reset on page 37 for additional information Cold Reset A cold reset clears the object store memory and restarts the operating system Registry set tings are maintained All installed programs and data files not located on permanent memory storage media such as the Flash Disk partition are lost Refer to Performing a Cold Reset on page 38 for additional details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 4 5 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Using a Dialog Box Using a Dialog Box A dialog box like the samples in Figure 4 4 appears when you need to make selections and enter further information You can move between dialog items by tapping on them with your stylus or by pressing the arrow keys and the TAB key SHIFT TAB moves the cursor backwards Figure 4 4 Dialog Boxes Date Time Properties Date Time EE February 2010 SMTWTEFS 3i 1 23456 WHS 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 26 ot 2 O S 6 o 10 11 12 13 6 04 21 AM Time Zone Default Gateway Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving Note You can use the stylus to tap on an element in a dialog box to select or deselec
145. ab Mode Tab Bluetooth Device Scan Duration E y 7 Printer Port Select Port y Sr asi gt The Discoverable option determines whether the WORKABOUT PRO is visible or invisi ble to other devices Device Scan Duration can be used to controls the duration in which the WORKABOUT PRO scans for other devices The higher the value assigned the greater the scan duration About Tab Paired Device Servers Mode About Device Name WORKABOUTPRO Local Address DO26B63B8C94 HCI Version 3 3164 LMP Version 3 3164 Component 2 1 2 Profiles Serial Client Server OBEX Client Server HSP HID host DUN DT E S 845i gt 7 Device Name displays the broadcasted name of the WORKABOUT PRO The name can be changed in the System Properties applet Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt System icon gt De vice Name tab Local Address displays the MAC address BD_Addr of the Bluetooth chip HCI Version amp LMP Version display the version of the chip firmware WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 125 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection Component indicates the version of the Psion Teklogix Bluetooth Subsystem the manager drivers etc Profiles lists the supported profiles on this specific WORKABOUT PRO 5 6 6 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection The following steps describe how to set up an internet data connection using a GSM cellular telephone
146. absolutely necessary Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock If an extension cord must be used make sure The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number size and shape as those on the charger The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG Do not expose the charger to rain or snow e Do not place batteries in the charger if they are cold from extended exposure to a freezer or outside temperatures below 10 C 50 F Allow them to warm up to room tempera ture for at least two hours Do not use the charger if after an overnight charge any of the batteries feel warmer than the charger housing The charger should be inspected by qualified service personnel Do not use the charger if any of the batteries or the charger get more than lukewarm The equipment should be inspected by qualified personnel Desktop Docking Station The WORKABOUT PRO can be inserted in a desktop docking station model number WA4003 G2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 187 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Desktop Docking Station Figure 6 3 Desktop Docking Station WORKABOUT PRO Charge Well Release Button Indicates charge status of a spare battery inserted in the rear charge well of the docking station Note The desktop docking charger is shipped with its own user ma
147. age e Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet If the power LED still does not light up Unplug the mains cable and check the fuse at the rear of the charger If the fuse appears to be intact the charger requires service 6 18 4 4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed e Remove the battery and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge well e Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the charger well Inspect the charge well contacts for damage are they bent flattened twisted or broken Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger well e Reconnect the mains power cable and check that the charger well indicator flashes at powerup WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 197 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Quad Docking Station WA4204 G2 amp WA4304 G2 6 19 6 19 1 Quad Docking Station WA4204 G2 amp WA4304 G2 LY Note WA4204 G2 is designed for WORKABOUT PRO C models WA4304 G2 is designed for WORKABOUT PRO S models The quad docking station is shipped with a docking manual It is critical that this manual be reviewed for additional information and updates The quad docking station permits each of four docked WORKABOUT PRO s to communi cate with a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet network at greater than 2Mbps It also provides sufficient power to operate and fast charge the batteries in the units Quad Doc
148. age E 14 E 18 WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual A Accepted Start Char D 44 accessories carrying case 181 desktop docking station 187 Ethernet adaptor cable 9 hand strap 173 holster soft shell 787 pistol grip 175 port replicator 204 quad battery charger 195 quad docking station 198 single battery charger 194 vehicle cradle 200 adaptor cable USB Ethernet 9 Addendum D 48 Addendum Add on 2 23 24 25 26 D 49 Addendum Add on 5 23 24 25 26 D 49 Addendum Required 24 25 26 Addendum Security D 49 Addendum Separator 24 25 26 Add Remove Data bar code scanning D 9 Prefix D 9 Strip Leading D 9 Suffix Char D 9 Ad Hoc network 17 Advanced wireless connection 23 Advanced tab Power Properties 113 AES Advanced Encryption Standard 17 Aim Duration D 2 aiming dot duration of D 2 All Predefined preset E 2 ALT Key 47 appearance display colour scheme 97 Append 22 appending to bar codes characters 148 App Launch 92 INDEX arrow keys moving the cursor 46 ASCI Full Ascii D 44 audio indicators beep conditions 52 volume adjustment 52 authentication network 18 B backlight display 95 intensity 50 keyboard 50 backplate trigger 176 backup battery backup profile creating Total Recall 158 backup profile restoring Total Recall 161 backup profile viewing Total Recall 162 Bad Scan Beep 749 Bar code Decoding symbology predefined presets E 2 bar code appending to
149. al dl dd dd sal fl Y Good Weak No Radio Reception Reception Link 54 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time Docking Device When a hand held is inserted in a docking station or charger an associated icon appears in the taskbar Bluetooth Radio This icon displayed in the taskbar represents the installed Bluetooth radio Security Level Security levels can be set to limit user access In addition applications can be restricted to prevent inadvertent changes Wireless WAN These icons provide access to and information about the WORKABOUT PRO GSM GPRS wide area networking status Refer to Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN for details about each of these taskbar icons l G sesos sesos Danos al ill all alll ill Dialer Icon The dialer phone icon is displayed when the Voice option is available a SIM card and GPRS radio are installed You can access the phone dialer by double tapping on this icon When you have an active call the dialer icon flashes yellow and then green Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time Note When the main battery is at 50 capacity a low battery warning is displayed When the battery is at approximately 10 capacity a very low main battery notifi cation appears As Lithium Ion batteries age their capacity decreases gradually and they are
150. aling 31 32 picker cradle installing cable 202 pinouts A pistol grip 175 Flush Mount installing 179 trigger backplate installing 176 Plessey Maximum Length 28 Plessey Minimum Length 28 Plessy Transmit Check Digit D 5 port pinouts A port replicator 204 Port Replicator Port A COM5 156 Baud 56 Data Bits 154 157 Parity 157 Stop Bits 157 Trigger On Sequence 755 157 Port Replicator Port B COM6 156 Port Replicator Port C COM7 156 ports LIF Low Insertion Force 4 1 tether 4 2 Ports parameters bar codes 153 PosiCode 33 Postal Predefined preset E 3 Postal Australian 39 Canadian 39 China 40 Japanese 40 Kix 40 Korean 4 PlaNET 38 PostNET 39 Royal 4 Power Management Properties 0 Power Mode Decoded Internal Scanner D 3 Power Properties Advanced tab 1 3 battery capacity 111 Built in Devices tab 1 4 Devices tab 114 Suspend Mode tab 115 Suspend tab power saving 1 1 Suspend Threshold tab 1 2 Wakeup tab 114 Predefined preset E All E 2 Default E 2 E 3 E 4 Glossy surface E 3 Linear E 3 Linear and PDF E 3 Low light E 3 Low light near E 4 Low power E 3 Matrix E 3 Motion E 4 Postal E 3 Predefined presets E 2 preferred networks 23 Prefix D 6 D 9 Preset Custom Group E Group default identifier E 2 Predefined E E 2 Preset group Default identifier 2 profile creating backup 58 profile restoring backup 161 profile viewing backup 162 Programs Command Prompt 75 Internet E
151. am dBm 50 55 60 65 75 trigger value radio performs roam scan 70 75 Custom or probes for an AP with stronger signal Roam Delta Amount by which second AP s RSSI dBm 5 10 15 20 25 10 must exceed the moving average RSSI 30 35 Custom for the current AP before the radio will attempt to roam to a second AP C 8 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU Global Settings Tab Global Setting Description Value Default Roam Period Following an association or roam scan Seconds 5 10 15 20 10 with no roam the number of seconds 25 30 35 40 45 50 the radio collects RSSI scan data before 55 60 Custom considering roaming BG Channel Set Defines the 2 4 GHz channels to be Full all channels Full scanned when the radio is set to roam 1 6 11 and needs to determine what APs are 1 7 13 available Custom DFS Channels Reserved Off On Off Aggressive Scan When this setting is On and the current Off On On connection to an AP becomes unrelia ble the radio scans for available APs more aggressively Aggressive scan ning complements and works in con junction with the standard scanning that is configured through the Roam Trigger Roam Delta and Roam Period settings It is recommended that Aggressive Scan is left On unless there is significant co channel interference because of overlapping coverage from APs on the same
152. ame Servers An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer Obtain an IP address via DHCP E paresi 7 Subnetmask C Default Gateway i face aie al a om i 5 Type the IP Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address in the appropriate fields Press ENTER to save the information 2 4 2 Name Servers Tab nN Note If DHCP is enabled name server addresses are assigned automatically If the Name Server tab is not already visible in the ZP Information screen tap on the Configure button Tap on the Name Servers tab Motorola LA51xx CF Card ok x IP Address Name Servers Name server addresses secondary wins C 22 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 2 4 3 2 4 3 1 2 4 3 2 2 4 3 3 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Advanced Features The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS and DNS resolvers The format for these fields is HHH HHH HHH HHH Advanced Features To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialog box Tap on the Advanced button in the Wireless Information tab Wireless Information To add a new network double click Advanced Wireless Settings ok x Add New in the list view or click Use Windows to configure my Add New button wireless settings Windows will connect to the following networks whenever they are available mauveman Configure Preference will be given to networks at
153. ameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed Enter value from O to 157 ld msec Type a value in the field provided For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes E 4 12 Removing a Custom Preset e Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 13 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet E 4 13 E 4 14 Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet All changes made in the Symbologies Presets in the Imagers Applet are also made in the Scanners Applet The Scanner Applet will reflect the settings of whichever Symbologies Preset is made active in the Imager Applet Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Scanners Applet When a symbology is enabled or con
154. ao seconds y When using external power keep the backlight always ON BJ E FEE AN Note Backlight changes take effect immediately You do not need to reset the unit 96 To maximize battery run time keep the display backlight brightness and active dura tions as low as possible Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the WORKABOUT PRO backlight Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity and sliding it to the right raises the intensity Bright For The value chosen from this drop down menu determines the duration of time that the back light stays on at the configured intensity after the last user action keypress scan trigger Dim For The value chosen from this drop down menu determines the duration of time that the back light stays on at half the configured intensity dimmed backlight after expiration of the Bright For delay and as long as no user action takes place such as a keypress or scan trig ger At the expiration of the Dim For duration the display backlight shuts off External Power Checkbox When you select the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON the backlight remains ON at the configured intensity when the WORKABOUT PRO WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties is operating with external power not battery power If the WORKABOUT PRO is drawing power from its bat
155. ars asking that you press the key you want to insert The ASCM Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Display Parameters Scan Result When this parameter is enabled the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the screen Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed When the trigger is released this information is cleared from the screen Scan Indicator When this parameter is enabled the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated Scan Result Time sec The value assigned to the Scan Result Time sec parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen Time is measured in seconds and a value of 0 zero disables the parameter When you choose this option a dialog box appears where you can enter a value Note To remove the scan result from the screen before the Result Time has expired point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger Good Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep These parameters determine whether or not the hand held emits an audible scanner beep when a good successful scan or a bad unsuccessful scan is performed Set these parame ters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it Soft Scan Timeout This parameter is used by the SDK Scan function soft scan starting a scan session v
156. ashes to improve decode performance Turn the hand held computer on Wait until the unit has booted up completely Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger Hold the trigger until a suc cessful or failed scan result is obtained When the scan button or trigger is pressed a red oval shaped light the framing marker is displayed Centre the framing marker in the field either in the centre of the bar code you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple bar codes are to be scanned The illumination LEDs will flash typically several times and a picture of the bar code s is taken WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 207 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Bluetooth Peripherals 6 29 208 Bluetooth Peripherals The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a Bluetooth radio making it is possible to com municate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals including GSM GPRS handsets scanners printers and so on The range of the Bluetooth radio is limited to approximately 5 meters Psion Teklogix provides built in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below e GSM GPRS universal handset Bluetooth printer Bluetooth headset Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802 11b g radios both operate in the 2 4GHz band Although the WORKABOUT PRO includes features to minimize interference perfor mance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneous
157. assword should not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box and the Prompt user for password checkbox should be checked instead In this case you will be prompted for the password each time a con nection is initiated the Connect Data button in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected If Force PAP authentication Password Authentication Protocol is enabled a simple authentication protocol is used to authenticate a user to a remote access server or Internet Service Provider Reset The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry fields to the values they had when the dialog box was opened WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 9 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN Advanced IP Figure B 4 Assigning IP Information Show Data Profile OK Show Advanced IP OK Name Default Use network assigned IP address APN intemet fido ca IP address A IS Use network assigned name servers Password DNS primary E _ Prompt user for password DNS secondary T 7 Force PAP authentication WINS primary el WINS secondary 2 The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes opens another dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well providing DNS and WINS fields so that you can specify DNS and WINS resolvers B 1 4 2 Security Configuration WWAN Security OK x N Current PIN NewPIN Requi
158. ated 0 00 B Sector Size 512 00 B Format Dismount Properties The new partition is automatically mounted This is indicated by an asterisk next to its name in the partition list Any unallocated space on the card is indicated at the left and addi tional partitions can be created in it 5 14 3 Partition Properties Partitions can be individually dismounted mounted deleted or formatted as well These and additional tasks are available from the Partition Properties dialog box Storage Properties OK x Storage Manager Partition Properties OK Eg Name PartO1 Size 82772 Sectors Type 0x06 File System fatfsd dll Flags 0x00000010 tout If Format Scan Defrag Dismounting a Partition 1 Choose the desired partition 142 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 2 3 Chapter 5 Configuration Partition Properties Tap the Properties button The Partition Properties dialog box appears Tap the Dismount button The partition is dismounted The asterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list Deleting a Partition l Ze 3 Select the desired partition Tap the Delete button A warning dialog box appears Tap the OK button The partition is deleted Formatting a Partition l 2 3 Choose the desired partition Tap the Properties button The Partition Properties dialog box appears Tap the Dismount button The partition is dismounted The a
159. bar A 4 2 My Device My Documents go controlpanel JE network 14 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring the 802 11a b g RA2043 Compact Flash Radio e Double tap on the radio icon to open the Wireless Statistics screen in the sample screen below the radio icon is labelled ECOS 01 E gt Make New Wireless Connection WAN ECOS101 o 8le2i i 543 Wireless Statistics Tab When you tap on the radio icon the Wireless Statistics window is displayed listing your radio statistics ECOS101 oki x IP Information Wireless Statistics gt NDIS Compliance 5 1 Driver Version 5 0 MAC Address 00 15 70 9c e0 aa Network Name Not Associated Access Point 00 00 00 00 00 00 Channel 1 2412 MHz RSSI dBm 100 Data Rate Mbps 0 0 Frame Size 1 Packets IN 0 Packets OUT 0 Errors IN 0 0 Errors OUT Gflae2ie0i 5453 Tapping on the Zero button resets the statistics of the last four items Packets IN Packets OUT Errors IN and Errors OUT Tap on the right arrow in the upper right corner of the screen to display the Wireless Information tab Tap on the Wireless Information tab to make it active WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 15 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring the 802 11a b g RA2043 Compact Flash Radio Wireless Information This tab lists available networks any access points that are broadcasting an SSID an
160. be automatically assigned to this computer O Specify an IP address IP Address a A Subnet Mask EET TI Default Gateway ae a E 2 5 2 Name Servers Tab e Inthe SDCCF10G1 window display the IP Information tab Inthe Summit WLAN Adapter Settings gt IP Information tab tap on the Configure button 26 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN Display the Name Servers tab Summit WLAN Adapter Se OK x IP Address Name Servers Name server addresses Primary DNS zz Secondary DNS ie gaat te ol Primary WINS EA Secondary WINS Mil The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS and DNS resolvers The format for these fields is HHH HHH HHH RRA 2 5 3 Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN This section provides a quick set of steps to create a profile Detailed information about each of the SCU tabs Main Profile Status Diags and Global Settings is provided in Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU To launch the SCU so that your WORKABOUT PRO can connect to a wireless LAN Tap on Start gt Programs gt Summit and then tap on the SCU icon WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 27 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN 28 Figure 2 4 SCU Main Tab a SEU Summit Client Utility Pox x
161. blank space between characters In a Windows dialog box press ing the SPACE key enables or disables a checkbox On the WORKABOUT PRO S numeric keyboard this key is accessed by key combination FN ORANGE 0 zero The BKSP DEL Key The BKSP key sometimes referred to as destructive backspace moves the cursor one character to the left erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke The DEL key FN BLUE BKSP erases the character at the cursor position 46 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 3 4 3 3 4 3 1 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Function Keys and Macro Keys The CTRL and ALT Key The CTRL and ALT keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent These keys are printed in blue type on the keys to the left and right of the SCAN key at the top of the keyboard They are accessed using a key combination FN BLUE followed by the CTRL or the ALT key The TAB Key Typically the TAB key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward The ESC Key Generally this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu dialog box or activity and return to the previous one On the QWERTY keyboard a key combination is re quired to access the ESC key Press FN BLUE TAB The Windows a START Key This key displays the Start menu The SCAN Keys All units are equipped with three SCAN keys one on the left side and
162. ble The signal strength icon is replaced by a connection indicator icon when a packet data con nection is started A GPRS packet data connection is active In addition to the signal strength or connection indicator a second icon may be shown A new SMS Short Message Service message has arrived The dialer icon is displayed when the Voice option is available SIM card and GPRS radio are installed When you have an active call this icon flashes yellow and then green Establishing A Connection To display the main Wireless WAN dialog box Double tap on the Wireless WAN icon in the taskbar If the icon is not visible in the taskbar the radio interface has been shut down or the modem has been removed Inthe Control Panel choose the Wireless WAN icon WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN Figure B 1 Wireless WAN Icon Stylus System gt Teklogix Teklogix Teklogix Error Imagers Scanners E H Jo Total Recall TweakIT Volume 8 Settings Wireless N wan PO So Me aS The main Wireless WAN dialog box is displayed Figure B 2 Establishing A Connection Wireless WAN OK File Tools SMS Network Signal Status Searching for modem Connect Data Raf Tx gt m bytes Note If you are prompted to enter a PIN refer to Entering A PIN Number on page B 4 for details When Ready to connect is d
163. ble supports Active Sync without requiring a docking station e Optional End Caps supporting RS232 TTL and IrDA Carrying Accessories e Hand strap pistol grip with trigger holster and various protective carrying cases and pouches Approvals Safety e CSA UL60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EN60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class B EN 55022 EN 55024 EN 301 489 e Laser TEC 60825 1 Class 2 FDA 21 CFR 1040 10 1040 11 Class II Bluetooth class II V 2 0 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 215 Chapter 7 Specifications Radio Specifications 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 216 RF Bluetooth and 802 11b g EN300 328 Part 15 247 GSM GPRS EN301 511 EN50360 361 NAPRD03 3GPP51 010 FCC Parts 22 amp 24 Industry Canada RSS 132 amp 133 e In Vehicle Cradle e Mark Radio Specifications Model RA2041 802 11 b g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS Form factor Antenna port Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels RX Sensitivity Data Rates Compact Flash Type I extended Two Hirose U FL connectors for antenna diversity 802 11g 32mW maximum 15 dBm 802 11b 80mW maximum 19 dBm 2 400 2 4897 GHz FCC 11 ETSI 13 TELEC 13 96dBm 1Mbps 90dBm Y 11Mbps 94dBm 6Mbps 75dBm Y 54Mbps 802 11g 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54Mbps 802 11b 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps Model RA2043 802 1 1a b g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS Form factor Antenna port Transmit Power Receive Power
164. ble tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a decode performance level of between 1 and 3 Length Restriction The parameters in this sub menu allow you to define the length of the bar codes that will be decoded using either the Field Size parameter or the Minimum Size and Maximum Size pa rameters see below The order of operation to either match the Field Size or determine if the length falls between the Minimum Size and Maximum Size is as follows e Strip the leading and trailing characters e Add the prefix and suffix characters e Count the number of characters remaining to either match the field size or determine if the length falls between the minimum and maximum size D 8 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 2 6 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 128 Field Size When a value is assigned for this parameter only bar codes that match the field size exactly can be transmitted If a value is assigned to this parameter a Minimum Size and Maximum Size value is not required Minimum Size And Maximum Size When a value is assigned to these parameters only bar code lengths that fall between the minimum and maximum value can be decoded If values are assigned to these parameters a Field Size value is not required Add Remove Data Prefix Char This character if non zero is added before a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this
165. bled Set Length L1 Set Length L2 And Set Length L3 Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Length Mode You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1 L2 L3 as Fixed Length Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Matrix 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Matrix 2 of 5 Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 53 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Discrete 2 of 5 D 4 16 D 4 17 Discrete 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Discrete 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 Format This parameter allows you to choose a standard format either Identic on 6 start stop bars or Computer Identics 4 start stop bars Check Digit Verification The available options f
166. blish the connection Use Virtual Serial Port If Use virtual serial port is enabled packet data connections are established through the virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver directly This checkbox should only be checked if certain third party VPN Virtual Private Network clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise The default setting is disabled unchecked Note The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port Enable Automatic Configuration In most cases the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is re quired This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the same device The connection parameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is detected this may require a warm boot The connection parameters are retrieved from a database Manual configuration should be necessary only if One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords e A very large site has their own APN Such connections always have to be configured manually WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 7 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN B 8 A customer has subscribed for a static IP address By definiti
167. bologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled In addition Center Bar Code Only must be disabled A composite symbol includes multi row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners The options available for this parameter represent multi level components of a composite symbol Enable CC C And Enable CC AB To activate these components set these parameters to on Linear Transmission Only When Linear Transmission Only is enabled only the linear code portion of the composite bar code is transmitted when scanned UPC EAN Composite Message This option allows you to choose how UPC EAN shared bar codes are transmitted Always Linked Never Linked or Auto discriminate TLC 39 Enable This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear Code 39 symbol Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter Linear Transmission Only When Linear Transmission Only is enabled only the linear portion of the composite bar code is transmitted when scanned D 56 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 4 21 D 4 22 Appendix D Bar Code Settings PDF 417 Security Level This parameter is used to differentiate between TLC 39 and standard Code 39 Tapping on Security Level displays a dialog box in which you can assign a value from 0 to 100 The higher the value assigned the lower the decode rate Length
168. bout which you d like more information As each icon is highlighted a tooltip is displayed e To display the associated Control Panel dialog box press ENTER Cycle Tasks When Cycle Tasks is selected and the Task Manager is not open you can cycle through active applications To cycle through your active applications WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 77 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Settings e Choose Start gt Shortcuts gt Cycle Tasks e Press ALT TAB to cycle through the open applications Task Manager The Task Manager allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task To display the task manager window Tap on Start gt Shortcuts gt Task Manager or Press ALT ESC lele lx Psion Teklogix Inc Home Internet 4 4 5 Settings The Settings sub menu includes the following settings Control Panel Network and Dial up Connections and Taskbar and Start Menu ar z My Device My Documents 2 gt E pel He Recycle Bin Remote Desktop 78 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 4 4 6 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Run Control Panel The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware the operating system and the shell If your WORKABOUT PRO is running with the Psion Teklogix TekTerm application or another application additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel Network And Dial Up Connections The N
169. boxes Restoring Default Settings If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter sub tree of parameters or all scanner parameters Press and hold the stylus on a symbology e g Code 128 to display a pop up a menu Scanner Settings ok x Barcodes Options Translations Scanner Decoded internal y Code 122 Default subtree Decode Performance on Decode Perf Level 1 a gt Field Size Chars To change a setting press space or double click a CEFEEJE e Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected or choose Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings To reset a single parameter to its default setting e Press and hold the stylus on the parameter you want to reset Scanner Settings ok x Barcodes Options Translations Scanner Decoded internal y Data Options ry Code 39 E Code 128 Enabled on Enable GS1 128 GS Enable t parameter Decode Default all settings Decode Perf Level Field Size Chars Ed 4 gt To change a setting press space or double click a CEFEEJE WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 147 Chapter 5 Configuration Options e Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting 5 16 3 Option
170. button opens the list of sent messages Otherwise the Outbox behaves exactly as the Inbox described above The date and time when a message was sent is not available for GSM modems SMS Configuration Tapping on the SMS Configuration button opens the SMS configuration dialog The SMS Centre address follows the same rules as the recipient s phone number in the New message dialog The message validity period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre with each message sent subsequently and instructs the SMS Centre on how long it should attempt to deliver the message to the recipient the SMS Centre may impose an upper limit on the validity period regardless of the setting Note Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus the validity period is rounded to the nearest allowed value The next time the SMS configu ration dialog is opened the rounded value is shown The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new incoming message if the Delete oldest message when full checkbox is checked In this case when a new message arrives and the SMS storage becomes full the oldest received message is de leted If any string is entered as the Message Suppression Prefix then messages beginning with that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or Outbox In this way messages in tended for another application running on the same device can be hidden from the user as long as those messages begin with the string con
171. c keyboard e Press the FN BLUE key followed by the 7 key the numeric key to which function key F7 is mapped To access function key F8 press FN BLUE 8 and so on Macro Keys WORKABOUT PRO C Only Important Refer to Keyboard Macro Keys on page 101 for details about creating macros WORKABOUT PRO C hand helds are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executable keys like the ENTER key the BKSP key any function key and arrow key and so on Alphanumeric keyboards have ten macro keys M1 to M10 These keys are colour coded in orange print above the numeric keys To access a macro key Press the FN ORANGE key followed by the appropriate numeric key from 1 to 0 To access macro key M1 press FN ORANGE 1 To access macro key M2 press FN ORANGE 2 and so on Alpha Keyboard Accessing Keys The alpha and numeric keys on WORKABOUT PRO C units are directly accessible from the keyboard no key combination is required QWERTY Keyboard Accessing Numeric Keys Alpha keys on a QWERTY keyboard are directly accessible Numeric keys are printed in orange type above some of the alpha keys and require a key combination to access them To access a numeric key Press the FN ORANGE key followed by the appropriate alpha key in the left hand panel of the keyboard To access press FN ORA
172. ccept the main bar code without an addendum Addendum Separator Addendum Separator is a space that is added between the EAN 13 bar code and the Add on code Addenda When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum ISBN Translate When this parameter International Standard Book Number is enabled the first 3 characters 978 are ignored and the checksum 0 9 X is calculated on the remaining characters Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details EAN 8 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 Check Digit If you enable this parameter a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Addendum Add on 2 And Addendum Add on 5 An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or 5 characters Addendum Required When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Addendum Separator Addendum Separator is a space that is added between the EAN 13 bar code and the Add on code Addenda When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 24 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 8 D 3 9 Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPC
173. channel CCX features Activates three CCX features AP Optimized Full Off Optimized assisted roaming AP specified maximum transmit power and radio management WMM Use Wi Fi Multimedia Extensions also On Off Off know as WMM TX Diversity Defines how to handle antenna diver Main only Use main Main only sity when transmitting data to AP antenna only Aux only Use auxil lary antenna only On Use diversity WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual C 9 Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU Global Settings Tab Global Setting Description Value Default RX Diversity Defines how to handle antenna diver On Start on Main On On Start on sity when receiving data from AP startup use main Main antenna On Start on Aux On startup use auxiliary antenna Main only Use main antenna only Aux only Use auxil iary antenna only Frag Thresh Packet is fragmented when packet size Integer from 256 to 2346 in bytes exceeds threshold 2346 RTS Thresh Packet size above which RTS CTS is An integer from 0 to 2347 required on link 2347 LED Available only with MCF 10G On Off Off Tray Icon Enables the System Tray icon Off On Off Hide Passwords On SCU as well as EAP authentica On Off Off tion dialog boxes hide passwords WEP keys and other sensitive information Admin Password Password that must be specified when A string of up to 64 SUMMIT Admin Login button is press
174. characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 60 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology Enable Setting this parameter to on enables RSS Code scanning capability Enable RSS Limited RSS Limited is restricted in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs global trade item number that begin with either a 0 or a 1 It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni directionally Enable RSS Expanded RSS Expanded uses the same application identifiers as UCC EAN 128 codes but they can be split into sections and stacked several rows high reducing the length of the symbol while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored RSS Expanded code can be omni direc tionally scanned Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 74 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D
175. ck type A Enable Codablock F Set this parameter to on to enable Codablock type F Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 58 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual APPENDIX TEKLOGIX IMAGERS APPLET E 1 E 2 The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create modify delete and activate imager settings The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the imager works Tap on Start gt Programs and then tap on the PTSI Imager icon to launch the demo Required Applets In order to configure imaging the Manage Triggers and Teklogix Scanners applets must be present in the Control Panel along with the Teklogix Imagers applet Presets There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Teklogix Imagers applet Use a predefined preset e Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset Important It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used whenever possible Each predefined preset contains a coherent group of settings that are known to work together in the intended environment In almost all situations at least one of the prede fined presets results in a satisfactory outcome A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings Each preset conf
176. ckup1 pfl windows killproc exe windows Fonts desktop ini windows Favorites desktop ini windows startup desktop ini windows recent desktop ini windows programs desktop ini windows desktop desktop ini Finalize Flash Disk Backup1 pfl El IDAS 5 17 2 Restoring a Profile To manually restore a profile Inthe Total Recall home screen tap on Restore Profile Tap on the button to the right of the Profile field and locate your backup file Total Recall Profile O Backup1_pfi D Documents and Settings Backup 1 Name Backup1 Type Totar Recall Profiles pf y WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 161 Chapter 5 Configuration Viewing a Profile In the Profile restore screen click on the gt Next button Click on Restore Profile to restore the files to your WORKABOUT PRO 5 17 3 Viewing a Profile To view a profile In the Total Recall home screen tap on View Profile Tap on the button to the right of the Profile field and locate your backup file Total Recall x Profile J Backup1_pf 3 Documents and Settings ammm Name Backup1 View Details Type Total Recall Profiles pfl y SL easi Tap on OK Total Recall Profile Flash Disk Backup1 pfl View Details 8 gt 8u45i Tap on View Details to review your backup files 162 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 17 4 5 18
177. code quality As se curity levels increase the scanner s decode speed decreases Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 4 Linear security level 1 specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Code Type Length Codabar All MSI Plessey 4 or less D5 of5 8 or less 12 o0f5 8 or less Linear security level 2 specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being decoded Linear security level 3 specifies that code types other than the following must be success fully read twice before being decoded The following codes must be read three times Linear security level 4 requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded Code Type Length MSI Plessey 4 or less D2 of5 8 or less 12 o0f5 8 or less WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual A S D 2 3 D 2 4 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Decoded Internal 2D Scanning Options Bi Direction Redundancy A Note This parameter is only valid ifa Linear Security Level is enabled When this parameter is enabled a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions forward and reverse before being decoded Scan Angle This option allows you to choose from two scan angles Normal Angle or Alternate Angle Choosing Normal Angl
178. cons navigate dialog boxes display the desktop and so on If your unit has already been fully configured and your application is launched at startup you ll have little need for keyboard navigation but you can refer to this table for a description of the navigation keys Operation Single Key or Key Combination Switch between active applications ALT TAB Open task manager ALT ESC WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 65 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Working with Files Folders and Programs Operation Single Key or Key Combination Move the cursor Arrow keys Open file folder or icon ENTER Exit amp Save ENTER Close Exit amp Do Not Save ESC Navigate Dialog Boxes TAB To move cursor up press SHIFT TAB To display the contents of the next tab in a dialog box press CTRL TAB Select Radio Button Press Button SPACE Go to Start Menu START Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer the WORKABOUT PRO does not support key chording pressing two keys at the same time You must press one key followed by the next in sequence Refer to Working with Files Folders and Programs on page 66 for addi tional details about keyboard navigation 4 2 Working with Files Folders and Programs Figure 4 1 Working With Windows Icons W y Desktop Favorites Fonts Fol d er O E Profiles Programs Recent O E I Program Ico
179. cro KeyS 0 ccc ce cece cence eee eee eeeenneeees 47 3 44 Alpha Keyboard Accessing Keys 0ccc cece eceee ee eee eet eeeeeneeees 48 3 4 5 QWERTY Keyboard Accessing Numeric KeyS 0 c cece eeeee eee ee 48 3 4 6 Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alphanumeric Keys 0 0 eee eee 49 34 7 TheKeypad Backlight coccion dees ddd 50 Phe Display LIA AAA 50 3 5 1 Adjusting the Display Backlight 00 cece cece cece ee ete eee e nee eenes 50 3 5 2 Calibrating the Touchscreen 00 c cece ccc eect e eee ene eee enneeees 51 WORK ABOUT PRO Indicators o n tts tine teki thts s bien aaa onan 51 O A ON 51 3 62 Atidio Indicators naneo ee RNS a ARR ee aa 52 3 6 3 Onscreen Indicators coco sees e use st a 53 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time 0 00 0 cece rererere 55 37 1 Storing Batteries de NS 56 Uploading Data In A Docking Station 00 c cece eee ence eee een ee eee eee nano 56 Bluetooth Radio SSSA ee hn AS hha nanan nn nated ene 57 3 9 1 Pairing a Bluetooth Headset or Other Bluetooth Device o 0ooo 57 Inserting The SD MMC Card And SIM Card 0 0 0 ccc cece eee cece eect serene 59 3 10 1 Inserting And Removing The Card 00 cee cece cece eee e eee ee eee eee ene 59 General Maintenance es 61 3 11 1 Caring For The Touchscreen ooooooococooccccrnrnrnnrrrrnrrr rr rr 61 3 11 2 Cleaning The WORKABOUT PRO
180. custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an ex isting custom preset To create a custom preset Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button A screen like the sample following is displayed Preset Name lok x Cloning from set Factory Default Enter alphanumeric string e Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box Tap on OK to save your changes The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset To change a parameter value E 12 WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Removing a Custom Preset e Highlight the custom preset and tap on the Edit button Preset Custom preset E All 1D With Strong Recovery 2D Aztec Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 Ean 8 La Tas To change a setting press space or double click Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change e Fora parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the par
181. d Open circuit voltage After standard charge measure within 24 hours 4 15V or more Internal Resistance After standard charge measure within 24 hours 150 mo max Capacity 1 After standard charge measure time taken for a fast discharge 110 minutes or more Charge Discharge Cycle After repeating standard charge and fast discharge measure the fast dis charge time after 300 discharge cycles 90 minutes or more Capacity _2 After standard charge measure the time taken for a standard discharge 500 minutes or more Over Discharge After standard charge apply a stand ard discharge followed by a standby discharge Then measure capacity after carrying out standard charge and then a fast discharge 110 minutes or more Self discharge After a standard charge keep battery at 25 C for 30 days Measure the time taken for a fast discharge 100 mins or more WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 229 Chapter 7 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 Description Temperature Condition Perform a standard charge and fast discharge at 0 C 25 C and 40 C and measured the time taken for a fast dis charge at 25 C Standard 100 mins 0 C 110 mins 23 C 105 mins 40 C Temp Humidity Cycle After standard charge carry out 5 cycles of the following 65 C and 90 humidity for 8 hrs 25 C and 65 humidity for 4 hrs
182. d 1D Laser SE1223LR WA9005 G1 Pod 1D Laser SE1524ER WA9009 End Cap includes a trigger back plate so that it can interface with the Flush Mount Pistol Grip WA6103 1D Imager EV15 WA9103 G1 End Cap without GSM WA9113 G1 End Cap with GSM WA9003 G1 Pod WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 235 Chapter 7 Specifications Scanner Specifications Scanner Imager Engine Kit Model No Form Factor 2D Imager SX5400 WA9008 Pod 2D Imager HHP 5180 WA8010 G1 End Cap without GSM WA9212 G1 Slim Pod 7 5 Scanner Specifications 7 5 1 SE1223HP LR and SE955HP Specifications Scan Engine SE 1223HP SE 1223LR SE 955HP Scan Angle 42 2 23 2 47 3 default 35 3 reduced Scan Rate 35 5 scans sec 35 5 scans sec 104 12 bi directional bi directional scans sec bi directional Scan Pattern Linear Linear Linear Wavelength 650nm 650nm 650nm Input Voltage 5 0 VDC 10 5 0 VDC 10 3 0 5 5 VDC 10 Input Current 110 mA typical 115 mA typical 65 mA typical Standby 130 uA typical 70 uA max 8 uA max Current Operating 40 C to 60 C 30 to 55 C 20 to 60 C Temperature 40 F to 140 F 22 F to 131 F 4 to 140 F WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 7 Specifications SE1223HP LR and SE955HP Specifications Scan Engine SE 1223HP SE 1223LR SE 955HP Print Contrast Minimum 20 Mi
183. d you can choose to force SHIFT to be on or off when the virtual key is sent If No Force is selected the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent When Function is selected a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box When Macro is selected the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box e Choose Virtual Key Function or Macro Choose a function from the Function list in the dialog box and tap on OK Editing a Scancode Remap To edit a scancode Inthe Scancode Remapping tab tap the stylus on the remap you want to edit Tap on the Edit button and make the appropriate changes Tap on OK to save your changes WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties Removing a Remap To delete a remap Inthe Scancode Remapping tab highlight the scancode you want to delete and tap on the Remove button e Tap on OK 5 5 3 8 Lock Sequence The Lock Sequence tab allows you to lock the hand held keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed accidentally when for example the unit is inserted in a holster Key Sequence Orange Blue 0 To lock the keyboard tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence Tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard locked at startup Inthe Key sequence drop down menu choose the key sequence you need to type to unlock the keyboard Note If
184. d a network but is not allowed to register e g no roaming agreement between networks The modem keeps searching for another network No network found A network is not currently available The modem continues search ing for a network Packet data not available The current network does not support a packet data service Packet data not allowed The modem is not allowed to use the packet data service on the current network e g no GPRS roaming agreement between network a roaming agreement for voice may still be in place It is also possible that you do not have a sub scription for GPRS at all The remaining error states are permanent SIM is missing The SIM card is missing After the SIM has been inserted a warm boot may be required SIM failure The SIM card is permanently disabled e g because the wrong PUK has been entered too many times A new SIM is needed Modem failure The modem did not respond to commands as expected If a warm boot does not clear this condition the modem may need to be replaced WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 5 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN e NDIS error An internal software error has occurred If a warm boot does not clear this condition Psion Teklogix technical support may need to investigate further B 1 4 Tools Menu The Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional advanced setup features Network
185. d it lists preferred networks that you have configured Since access points are generally secure they will most likely not be listed here By default WORKABOUT PRO attempts to connect to preferred networks This behaviour can be changed by enabling Automatically connect to non preferred networks in the Advanced Wireless Settings dialog box page 23 Wireless Information To add a new network double click Add New in the list view or click Add New button Add New Configure Refresh Status Not Connected Signal Strength No Signal Notify me when new wireless networks are available 2 8 si 645 Note Configure button To change the settings in an existing network highlight the network you want to modify and tap the Configure button to display the Wireless Properties dialog box Connect button To force connection to a specific existing network highlight the network to which you want your unit to connect and tap the Connect button To add a new configuration tap on the Add New button in the Wireless Information tab 16 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual A Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring the 802 11a b g RA2043 Compact Flash Radio Wireless Properties Wireless Properties ok Network name SSID 7 This is an ad hoc network wireless access points are not used Encryption AES iv Authentication weaz y Network key Key index
186. d rather than a touchscreen Press the Windows START button to display the Start Menu e Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item and press ENTER or If the menu item has an underlined character e Type the underlined alpha character For example to display the Security dialog box type the letter s 72 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 4 4 1 4 4 2 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 The Desktop The Desktop Choosing Desktop in the Start Menu displays the WORKABOUT PRO desktop E oa My Device My Documents vw x Recycle Bin Remote Desktop El Internet Explorer ag Microsoft WordPad Security Settings Choosing the Security option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can define the access level for the WORKABOUT PRO Supervisor or User Figure 4 3 Security Levels Security Level O supervisor User Password Set Password Assigning the Supervisor Security Level The security level is represented by an icon in the shape ofa lock in the taskbar The security levels define the options accessible to the operator in the Start Menu and the taskbar By de fault the security level is set to User restricting access to only the most basic Start Menu items To allow access to all the Start Menu and taskbar options e Inthe Security Level dialog box tap on the radio button next to Supervisor WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 73
187. d to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Display Properties e Once you ve assigned an application tap on OK App Launch Keys ok x Key Data app 1 Shift Microsoft Word Key rift 1 App fiWindows Programs Microsoft Data 2 Remove Ifyou need to Edit Remove or Add another App Launch Key you can do it from this final screen Otherwise tap on OK to save your Application Launch Key e To launch the application you chose press the application key you assigned 5 5 2 Display Properties In the Control Panel choose the Display icon A Display 5 5 2 1 Display Backlight The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time when the WORKABOUT PRO is in use key press scanner trigger or data received from the host The Display Prop erties dialog box in the Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long the display will maintain the specified intensity RN Note Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 95 Chapter 5 Configuration Display Properties In the Display Properties dialog box open the Backlight tab Display Properties OK Background Appearance Backlight Intensity dak Bright for 20 seconds y Dim for
188. de the scanner is always on waiting for a trigger pull or a serial communication In Low Power mode the scanner is in a standby state drawing minimal power until a trigger pull or serial communication wakes 1t Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable for battery powered applications there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to scan a bar code Low Power Timeout To extend laser life you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a successful decode The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned a successful decode restores normal blinking When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec 1 min 2 min or 3 min AA Note This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the WORKABOUT PRO is mounted in a fixed position otherwise Low Power Timeout is not used Parameter Scanning Setting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter bar codes WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Advanced Options Decoded Internal D 4 Linear Security Level This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your bar code quality There are four levels of decode security for linear code types e g Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of bar
189. de Settings Matrix 2 of 5 D 3 16 D 3 17 If Check Digit is set to Validate and Transmit the check digit is validated and transmitted with the data Setting this parameter to None disables this function Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Matrix 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Matrix 2 of 5 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details IATA 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable IATA 2 of 5 D 30 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 18 D 3 19 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Discrete 2 of 5 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e
190. de Settings Trioptic Code If Check Char is set to Validate and Transmit the check character is validated and trans mitted with the data Setting this parameter to None disables this function Minimum And Maximum Length Minimum and Maximum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 48 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Append If this parameter enabled any Code 39 bar code that contains a space as the first character will be stored in memory Once a Code 39 barcode containing a non space first character is scanned this bar code will be appended to the bar codes containing the spaces and the imager will transmit the ALL the data The spaces are then removed Pharmaceutical This is a numeric 0 9 fixed length barcode used by Italian pharmacies It is also referred to as Code 32 Pharmacode and is a form of Code 39 Full ASCII If this parameter is enabled the characters and are used as escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Trioptic Code This code is used for labelling magnetic storage media Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables Trioptic Code D 22 WORKABOUT
191. details Codablock Enable Set this parameter to on to enable Codablock Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 2048 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 36 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 29 D 3 30 D 3 31 Appendix D Bar Code Settings 2D Data Matrix 2D Data Matrix Enable Set this parameter to on to enable 2D Data Matrix Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 1500 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details 2D QR Code Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D QR Code Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
192. dex WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual SE 955 scanner 236 Standby shutdown dialog 13 Start Stop Transmit D 2 27 D 44 D 50 Start Menu 7 cycle tasks 77 desktop 73 programs 75 Run 79 Security 73 Settings 78 Shutdown 80 system tray 77 task manager 78 Stop Bits 155 157 Strip Leading D 9 Strip Trailing D 9 stylus touch pen using 65 Stylus Properties 1 6 Calibration 1 6 Double tap stylus sensitivity 116 Suffix D 6 Suffix Char D 9 Summit Client Utility SCU 24 C 1 super high capacity battery pack WA3010 227 Supervisor security level 73 Supp Redundancy Code 128 D 2 Supplementals UPC EAN D 2 Surface Glossy E 3 Suspend shutdown dialog 3 Suspend Shutdown menu 80 Suspend Mode tab Power Properties 115 Suspend tab Power Properties 111 Suspend Threshold tab Power Properties 112 Suspend Timeout 2 swap time for battery 43 SX5400 imager specs 243 system tray 77 T TAB Key 47 target dot duration of D 2 taskbar customizing 70 onscreen indicators battery gauge 54 dialer phone 55 docking devices 55 modifier keys 53 phone dialer 55 security level 55 Wireless WAN 55 802 11 radio signal quality 54 using 69 task manager 78 Teklogix Imagers Applet E Teklogix Imagers Settings 144 Teklogix security level 73 TekTerm application 87 Telepen 31 D 54 Tether Port COM21 154 Baud 754 Parity 155 Stop Bits 755 tether port pinout 4 2 text conventions 4 TKIP Temporal Key Integrity
193. dialog boxes in which you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize The parame ters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit 1234 Teklogix Scanners For a listing of available scanners and their specifications please refer to Chapter 7 Specifications e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and then tap on the Teklogix Scanner icon E Options E Advanced Options E 2D Scanning Options E Data Options Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 ESN 8 UPC A UPC E E To change a setting press space or double click 5 16 1 The Scanner Menu AN Important Appendix D Bar Code Settings provides descriptions of the bar codes listed in the scanner menus The drop down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from one of the following Decoded internal Decoded HHP and Decoded Intermec ISCP The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes it supports To improve the decode speed and performance enable only those codes that are required by the application 146 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 16 2 Chapter 5 Configuration Restoring Default Settings Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed All internal scanners can be configured using the Barcode dialog
194. dify delete and activate imager settings The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images Teklogix Scanners Provides scanner parameters and the bar code symbologies that the WORKABOUT PRO scanner will successfully read WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 91 Chapter 5 Configuration Basic Setup Total Recall D Provides access to a backup and restore utility to maintain applications and settings over j 2 cold reboots Total Recall TweakIT Settings wl Allows you to change Advanced System Settings interface network and servers User Pater System Settings display font size and provides the Registry Editor Volume amp Sounds JO Allows you to adjust the volume of the sound emitted to indicate events like warnings key Volume amp Clicks and screen taps Sounds Wireless WAN Provides access to technology like GSM GPRS which allows wide area networking capa wenes bility such as internet browsing via GSM GPRS It also provides access to the Phone API For detailed information see Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN 5 5 Basic Setup 5 5 1 App Launch This applet allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the appli cation from a single key press Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Tap on the App Launch Keys icon E E App Launch Keys 92 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Conf
195. discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 4 to 14 Check Digit Verification When enabled this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm either USS Uniform Symbology Specifica tion or OPCC Optical Product Code Council Transmit Check Digit If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the bar code data Convert To EAN 13 If this parameter is enabled the I 2 of 5 bar code is converted to EAN 13 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 2 16 Discrete 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Discrete 2 of 5 Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s D 16 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 2 17 Appendix D Bar Code Settings RSS Code Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code len
196. ds for enable the conditions under which you want the WORKABOUT PRO to emita beep 5 5 4 2 Sound Adjustments Volume amp Sounds Properties OK x Sounds l Microphone Close Program gt Critical Stop Default Sound Empty Recycle Bin Qe Exclamation Sound i None y Scheme windows CE Default y _Save As E i a as 3 This dialog box allows you to assign sounds to identify a particular actions For example you can choose the sound your hand held will emit when you close a program and choose another sound for a failed scan etc WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 109 Chapter 5 Configuration Power Management Properties 5 5 4 3 Microphone Adjustments 5 5 5 110 Yolume amp Sounds Properties ok x volume Sounds Microphone Built in Microphone y Default Default All Use this dialog box to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand held Tap on the drop down menu and choose the microphone for which you want to adjust the gain Slide the microphone tab to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain Tapping on the Default button sets the current microphone you ve chosen to the default gain Tapping on Default All sets all microphones listed to their default gain Power Management Properties The Power Properties dialog box indicates battery capacity and allows you to manage batte
197. e Refer to Linking a WORKABOUT PRO to a PC on page 190 for more details about the desktop docking station and how to link to a PC The WORKABOUT PRO can be connected to a PC using the desktop docking station Insert the unit in the desktop docking station Usea Client USB connector to complete the communication link between the hand held and the PC 30 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 2 8 2 8 1 2 8 2 2 9 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Data Transfer Between the PC amp the Hand Held Data Transfer Between the PC amp the Hand Held Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC Microsoft ActiveSync is PC connectivity software that can be used to connect your hand held to PCs running this software ActiveSync works only with the Windows XP SP2 operating system or earlier If the Microsoft Vista operating system is installed in your PC ActiveSync is not required to transfer data between your WORKABOUT PRO and your PC By connecting the WORKABOUT PRO to a PC with a cable you can View WORKABOUT PRO files from Windows Explorer Drag and drop files between the WORKABOUT PRO and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives Back up WORKABOUT PRO files to the PC then restore them from the PC to the hand held again if needed and so on Using Microsoft ActiveSync To install ActiveSync follow the step by step instruc
198. e key or DOWN ARROW the decrease volume key until the volume meets your requirements e Remember to press the FN BLUE key again to turn it off WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Onscreen Indicators 3 6 3 Onscreen Indicators The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators Figure 3 5 Taskbar r r gt A My Device My Documents vw 2 Recycle Bin Remote Desktop td Internet Explorer E9 Microsoft WordPad The taskbar changes dynamically and only those icons that are applicable are displayed For example if a radio is not installed in your WORKABOUT PRO the radio signal icon is not _ displayed in the taskbar Windows Start Button If you are using the touchscreen you can either tap the Windows icon at the bottom left of the screen or press FN BLUE period to display the Start Menu and then tap on the desired application blue BLUE key KEY Modifier Key Indicators SHIFT CTRL ALT FN BLUE and FN ORANGE are modifier keys that when pressed are displayed in the taskbar to indicate that they are active If a modifier key is locked on it is displayed in uppercase characters For example if the FN BLUE key is locked on it is displayed as BLUE KEY in the taskbar A locked modifier key remains active until it is pressed again to unlock or turn it off WORKABOUT PRO with Wi
199. e COM21 Port Replicator Port A COMS Port Replicator Port B COM6 S Port Replicator Port C COM7 To change a setting press space or double click e aim WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 153 Chapter 5 Configuration Ports Tab 5 16 5 1 Tether Port device COM21 Scanner Settings ok x Barcodes Options Translations Ports S Tether Port device COM21 Enabled off Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Trigger On Sequence 00 00 0C Trigger Off Sequence DO 00 DC Port Replicator Port A COMS Port Replicator Port B COM6 Port Replicator Port C COM To change a setting press space or double click ais gt Enabled This parameter allows you to turn the tether port on enable and off Baud Double tapping on this parameter displays a pop up window in which you can choose an ap propriate baud rate Data Bits This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte Most devices use 8 bit data bytes Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits 154 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Ports Tab Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the tether port Double tapping on this option displays a pop u
200. e Data on page D 9 for details Postal PlaNET Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal PlaNET Check Digit If enabled the check digit will be transmitted at the end of the scanned data D 38 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 34 D 3 35 D 3 36 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Postal PostNET Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Postal PostNET Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal PostNET Check Digit If enabled the check digit will be transmitted at the end of the scanned data Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Postal Australian Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Australian Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Postal Canadian Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Canadian Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 39 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Postal China D 3 37 D 3 38 D 3 39 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Po
201. e Name When you have completed all the changes tap on the OK button E 17 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Teklogix Scanners Applet E 4 16 2 Configuring Triggers Viewing the Trigger Configuration The trigger on the WORKABOUT PRO is configured using the Manage Triggers applet The Teklogix Imagers applet provides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet e e the checkbox next to Show all modules In the Advanced tab tap on the Trigger Control button To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them tap in Triggl File Location My Documents File Name Load Defaults Adding Editing and Removing Triggers PTS Imager Settings Filter Translations Imager Built in Service Max Number Barcodes fu 15 ficsimg Advanced ab Format pg For instruction about adding editing and removing triggers refer to Manage Triggers on page 135 E 5 Teklogix Scanners Applet The bar code symbologies that are to be read by the imager can be enabled using the Tek logix Scanners applet Tapping on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel followed by the Teklogix Scanners icon displays this applet Warning Changes made to the symbology configuration using the Teklogix Scanner applet are synchronized only with the My Defaults bar code symbology preset For details refer to Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet on p
202. e allows the normal operation for scanning long range and short range Choosing Alternate Angle widens the beam to allow scanning of long bar codes at short range but at the cost of long range scanning Decoded Internal 2D Scanning Options Scanning Mode When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose one of the following scanning modes Smart Raster Always Raster Programmable Raster Slab Pattern Cyclone Pattern or Semi Omni Pattern Raster Height And Raster Expand Rate These parameter determine the laser pattern s height and rate of expansion Note These parameters are only used when either Programmable Raster or Always Raster is assigned to the 2D Scanning Mode parameter 2D Raster Height and 2D Raster Expand Rate are intended for very specific applications and are usually not required for normal scanning purposes Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 15 Data Options Decoded Internal Scanner Transmit Code ID Char A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type In addition to any single character prefix already selected the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a transmit code None AIM or Symbol WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 5 Appendix D Bar
203. e option Buttons This type of button allows you to Save Delete and so on the options you ve chosen in a dialog box Use the TAB key to highlight the button you want to use Press the ENTER key to activate it Saving Your Choices Once you ve made all your changes press the ENTER key to save your changes and exit the window Note A dialog box item that is displayed in grey text indicates that it is not currently available WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual CONFIGURATION 5 5 1 Remote Comet 87 5 2 The TekTerm Application 2 2 o e 87 5 3 The Control Panel ii a Be aK oe ae 87 5 4 Control Panel Icons 2 2 a 88 So BASIC Setup ata ccd ft ee ae Guach ook a a Sb Be ee E a 92 SS App Launch ido ein ce yar bh ef Eee te Be ae eae 92 5 5 2 Display Properties s e wi a e a ee aa 95 5 5 2 1 Display Backlight 95 5 5 2 2 Display Appearance ee ee ee 97 5 5 3 Keyboard Properties s a eine i en a 97 5 5 3 Rey Repeat s 00 hata Sie rat deat eee ae er ieee N AE S 97 5 5 3 3 Keyboard Backlight 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 000 eee 99 5 5 3 4 Keyboard One Shots Mode o 100 5 5 3 5 Keyboard Macro Keys 101 5 5 3 6 Unicode Mapping eee ee 103 5 5 3 7 Scancode Remapping 2 000000 104 5 5 3 8 Lock Sequence Tais a se w a a hae 107 5 5 4 Volume And Sound Properties 2 0 0 00 a
204. econd When the LED flashes green release the Power button The desktop screen is displayed Note If the unit was already in use the unit may be off suspend state pressing ENTER wakes the unit from this state The screen in which you were working prior to the suspend state is displayed 12 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 2 2 2 2 3 AA Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Switching the Unit Off Suspend amp Standby Switching the Unit Off Suspend amp Standby e Press and hold down the Power button A Shutdown dialog box like the one below is displayed Each option switches off different elements of the WORKABOUT PRO each shutdown option displays an associated description a er E Pr My Device My A Ld Shutdown My Device My es off the device Allow applications to run while Cancer o DMD nif Choosing Suspend places the hand held into a power saving suspend state In this state all radios remain on but the display keyboard backlight and processor are switched off When the WORKABOUT PRO is turned on from this state operation resumes within a few seconds in the screen in which you were working prior to suspend If you choose Standby the display is turned off the keyboard is locked and the touchscreen is locked The processor remains on so that any running applications will continue while the hand held is in a Standby state In addition the radios remain on Keep in m
205. ed Set this parameter to on to enable Code 16K Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 160 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 35 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 49 D 3 27 D 3 28 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Code 49 The Code 49 bar code is a multiple row bar code that can encode the full ASCII character set below ASCII 128 Up to 49 alphanumeric characters or 81 numeric characters can be encoded into two to eight rows Each row is divided by a separator bar The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 49 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 81 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for
206. ed characters Auth Timeout Specifies the number of seconds that An integer from 3 to 60 8 the software will wait for an EAP authentication request to succeed or fail If authentication credentials are specified in the active profile and the authentication times out then associa tion will fail If authentication creden tials are not specified in the active profile and the authentication times out then the user will be re prompted to enter authentication credentials Certs Path Directory where certificates for EAP Valid directory path up Dependent authentication are stored to 64 characters on device C 10 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU Global Settings Tab Global Setting Description Value Default Ping Payload Amount of data to be transmitted ona Bytes 32 64 128 256 32 ping 512 1024 Ping Timeout ms Amount of time in milliseconds that Integer from 0 to 5000 passes without a response before ping 30000 request is considered a failure Ping Delay ms Amount of time in milliseconds Integer from 0 to 1000 between successive ping requests 7200000 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual C 11 APPENDIX D BAR CODE SETTINGS D 1 Scanner Menu To display this dialog box tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Tap on the Teklogix Scanners icon 1234 Teklogix Scanners Options
207. ed that is Forward the call only when it is not answered after a specified number of seconds Forward the call when you have identified yourself as unavailable or Forward the call when your unit is busy Tap in the appropriate checkbox and enter the phone number to which the call will be routed 34 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Voice Menu Call Management The Call Management option only becomes available in the Voice menu when at least one phone call is either On hold or Active When you choose this command the currently active phone call s is listed in a dialog box Wireless WAN x Call Management Ble Tools sms FATE number es Data Voice Cal Management 4165551212 On hold Call Lists gt 4165551314 Active 1 2 3 8 fii Bre 61 0 t 8 88 94 987109 25 wu OF Using the drop down menu you can choose to Hang Up All Calls This option only appears when more than one call is listed Hang Up This option disconnects only the call you ve highlighted in the list Hold This option places the call you ve highlighted on hold Retrieve This option is only available when a call is on hold and choosing it retrieves the call you have highlighted from hold Inthe Call Management list highlight the phone number to which you d like to apply a command e Choose a command from the drop down menu and
208. ed at a 45 degree angle to the hand held will be decoded successfully Note When scanning multiple bar codes ensure that all of the desired bar codes are within the field of view of the scanner It is possible that even when all bar codes are within the field of view not all of them will be decoded Only successfully decoded bar codes are passed to the application program The application program then issues a warning asking that you scan the missing bar codes When scanning a single bar code ensure that only the desired bar code is within the field of view of the scanner Because imagers generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of bar codes being scanned Al though the imager includes illumination LEDs ambient light will help the imager decode the bar codes especially if the bar code is far from the hand held Important Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera and the LED illumination is a flash Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated bar codes just as glare is an issue for photographers When pointing at a shiny surface either shift the bar code to the side or top or angle the bar code so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner Most imagers take several snap shots of the bar code in order to decode it It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times Hold the unit steady between fl
209. een It displays icons through which you can view the battery capacity and radio signal quality of your unit If the hand held is attached to a charger cradle or docking station an associated icon is dis played In addition the taskbar displays the application s currently running on your unit and the security level assigned to your WORKABOUT PRO The taskbar also displays active modifier keys SHIFT ALT CTRL FN BLUE and FN ORANGE Keys that have been locked on are displayed in uppercase letters For ex ample if you have set the CTRL key Lock to on in the Keyboard menu and you press the key 1t is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar For detailed information on modifier keys and keyboard options see The Keyboard on page 45 Using the Taskbar A tooltip is displayed as each taskbar icon is highlighted The tooltip provides the status of each icon If you re using the touchscreen Tap and hold the stylus on an icon to display the icon s tooltip Double tap the icon to open the Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon For example double tap the battery icon to display a dialog box listing the current battery capacity information On the keyboard e Press the Windows START button to display the Start Menu Choose Shortcuts from the Start Menu and then press the RIGHT arrow key to display the sub menu WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 69 Chapter 4 Working With W
210. ees eae Raid E 5 E 3 3 Setting the Active Preset 0 0 cece eect e eee cence eee e eee eeenneeennes E 5 E34 y Viewing a Preset ssacastagtacaaiicaiiantt ee AeA ion Sas E 6 E 3 5 Creating a Custom Preset ccc cece cence eee eee n rr rr E 6 E 3 6 Modifying a Custom Preset 0 cece cece ee cence cent et eee teen rs E 6 E 3 7 Removing a Custom Preset 00 cece cece ee cence eee e eee rr E 7 E 4 Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets 0 e cece eeeee eee cece eee E 8 EST Selecting Cameri loa E 8 E42 Setting the Active Preset c ccsccccc502 nE E eee econ E 9 A Viewing aPresetin f22 452 2242224282224 awed eee ee ew BE MRA gees E 9 E 4 4 Creating a Custom Preset 0 0 cece cece cece eee e eee rr E 9 E 4 5 Modifying a Custom Preset 00 cece cece cece eee ee eect een teen eees E 10 E 4 6 Removing a Custom Preset 0 cece cence cence eee eee rr E 11 E 4 7 Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Symbologies 000ee eee E 11 E 4 8 Setting the Active Preset 00 cece eect e eect e eee ee eee n rr E 11 E49 Viewing rd bd E 11 E 4 10 Creating a Custom Preset 0 00 ccc cece eect e eee e ence tenet eeenneenes E 12 E 4 11 Modifying a Custom Preset 0 cece eee eee cence eee e ee eee teen eees E 12 E 4 12 Removing a Custom Preset 0 cece cece eee cee eee ee teen rr E 13 E 4 13 Configuring Symbologies in the Teklo
211. eleased This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly triggers on off D 42 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual El D 4 3 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 39 Low Power Timeout To extend laser life you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a successful decode The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned a successful decode restores normal blinking When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec 1 min 2 min or 3 min Note This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the WORKABOUT PRO is mounted in a fixed position otherwise Low Power Timeout is not used Parameter Scanning Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter bar codes Same Read Validate The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result The value assigned at this parameter determines the number of reads required from 0 to 10 times Same Read Timeout Prevents the same bar code from being read more than once The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout from 0 to 2550 msec Diff Read Timeout Prevents unwanted reading of other bar codes on the same label The value assigned deter mines after what time period the scanner will timeo
212. eless WAN icon to display the Wireless WAN dialog box Advanced Information In most cases when a GSM GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your computer setup is automatic Follow the steps outlined under the heading Establishing A Connection on page B 2 to make a connection The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes Entering A PIN Number If a PIN is required a PIN entry dialog box is displayed Type your PIN and press ENTER Note If you exceed the number of allowable attempts a PUK entry window is brought to the foreground You ll need to enter a new PIN number B 4 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required the modem is instructed to perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach The main Wireless WAN dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization e Searching for modem e Initializing modem SIM is ready e Searching for network Registered on network e Searching for GPRS e Ready to connect If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network the following states are repeated Searching for network Registered on network Searching for packet data and Ready to connect Error States The following temporary error states 1 e these states may disappear without interaction may be displayed Emergency calls only The modem has foun
213. em Settings These Internet Explorer options are designed to make it easier to view and navigate web pages displayed on WORKABOUT PRO WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration User Directional Tabbing Fit to Screen and Focus Rectangle When Directional Tabbing is enabled arrow keys can be used to navigate to various links text boxes and so on around the page rather than limiting you to the TAB key Fit to Screen reformats the web page on the WORKABOUT PRO screen into a single column eliminating the need for horizontal scrolling Enabling Focus Rectangle adds a yellow rect angle around the cursor to make it clearly visible on the screen 5 18 2 2 User Display Settings TweakIT Settings Advanced User Registry Editor H a User System Settings FET EFE User Font Size This option allows you to adjust the size of the font used the WORKABOUT PRO display Large Normal or Small WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 167 Chapter 5 Configuration Registry Editor 5 18 2 3 User System Settings TweakIT Settings User Registry Editor H a Internet Explorer Settings 2 User Display Settings S User System Settings cking Port Message So easis Docking Port Message Checking this box blocks the message that normally pops up on the display when the WORKABOUT PRO is docked 5 18 3 Registry Editor TweakIT Setti
214. er On Sequence And Trigger Off Sequence If a SICK scanner connected to the WORKABOUT PRO port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off the Trigger On Se quence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams Double tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of 10 elements E fo fo fo fo po po fo These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned For example supposed you launch Manage WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 157 Chapter 5 Configuration Total Recall Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the module to trigger Next you assign a trigger key for this example period To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the trigger key enter a hex value in the Trigger On Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields When you press the trigger key the Trigger On Sequence is sent and when you release the trigger key the Trigger Off Sequence is sent turning the trigger key on and off 5 17 Total Recall Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and settings during a cold boot This utility is based on a backup and restore concept e Inthe Control Panel choose the Total Recall icon Total Recall 5 17
215. er second cps Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate Note Use the field at the bottom of this dialog box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you ve chosen 98 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties 5 5 3 2 Sequence Keyboard Properties OK x Backignt onl This tab determines the allowable pause between alpha key presses on a numeric keyboard For example suppose you want to type the letter c you would need to press the 2 key three times With the ORANGE key locked on if you press 2 twice and then pause between key presses for 1 second the letter b will be selected automatically Moving the Sequence slider to the right increases the allowable pause time between alpha key presses 5 5 3 3 Keyboard Backlight Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Backlight tab eyboard Propertie OK x Repeat Sequence Backlight Ong gt Intensity On for fas seconds y 0 When using external power keep the backlight always ON EA D gt i 45I WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 99 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties A J C S 100 A A Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard backlight Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard
216. ernet connection desktop dock 191 Ethernet connection quad dock 198 WORKABOUT toPC 30 190 Composite D 18 33 D 56 Concatenation 27 conference calls creating 35 configuring IEEE 802 11g radio 14 Continuous Scan Mode D 3 D 20 D 42 Control Panel Predefined presets E 2 control panel accessing 87 basic setup 92 Display Properties 95 icons 88 keyboard properties 97 power management properties 0 stylus properties 1 6 Conv UPC E To UPC A D 2 Conv UPC E1 To UPC A D 2 Convert To Code 32 D 7 Convert To EAN 13 D 16 D 47 Convert To UPC A D 48 cradle See also Picker cradle 200 CTRL Key 47 Custom preset E cycle tasks 77 D Data Bits 154 157 Data Handling code page 130 Data Matrix 2D 37 debug error handling 132 Decoded HHP Scanner 19 Index Decoded Internal Scanner D 2 Decoded internal scanner parameters D 2 Decoded Intermec ISCP parameters D 42 decoded scanner D 2 Decode Performance D 8 D 10 Decode Performance Level D 8 D 10 Decoding symbology Predefined symbology E 2 Default Predefined preset E 2 E 3 E 4 Default identifier Preset group E 2 Default Local ASCII Code Page 150 DEL BKSP Key 46 Delete Char Set ECIs D 6 Demo Imager 75 Scanner 75 Signature 75 desktop connection remote 87 desktop docking station WA4002 187 Devices tab Power Properties 114 dialer phone using 31 Dialer phone icon 35 dialing phone number 31 32 dialog box using 8 Diff Read Timeout D 43 digit
217. ertificates l A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate The certificate assigned through this icon heal is used to ensure that the submitted public key is in fact the public key that belongs to the Certificates submitter The client checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the client explicitly trusts Certificate Assignment on page 130 provides ad ditional information 88 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons COM Port Manager Lists the device names and COM port mappings stored in the registry for the currently com Port active and for dynamic devices like port replicators USB serial dongles and virtual ports Manager The COM Port Manager allows you to edit the COM port mappings and add new ports for Bluetooth external connections Date Time Dd Allows you to set the current Month Date Time and Time Zone on your unit Date Time Dialing i Specifies dialing settings including area code country code dial type and the code to disable call waiting You can store multiple patterns for example Work Home and so Diang on using this dialog box EN Changes the appearance window colour scheme on the unit desktop Display Display Dr Debug Acts as an error diagnostic tool aoe Error Reporting Ga Enables or disables Microsoft error reporting prompts and at your discretion allows you to
218. ery charging will begin It is safe to leave the unit in the desktop docking station while it is not in use the battery will not be overcharged 6 10 2 Charging a Spare Battery Insert the battery in the spare battery charge well at the back of the docking station aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the spare battery charge well WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 189 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Battery Charge Duration 6 10 3 6 10 4 Battery Charge Duration A fully discharged battery can take up to 5 hours to charge The desktop docking station stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge well Charger LED Indicators The desktop docking station is equipped with a single dual coloured LED indicator in the lower right corner of the front panel Table 6 1 Desktop Docking Station Battery Charge LED Behaviour LED Behaviour Charge Status Off No battery detected in the slot Solid Green Charge complete Fast Flashing Green Battery charged to less than 80 of capacity Slow Flashing Green Battery charged to greater than 80 of capacity Solid Red Battery temperature outside of charge range of 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F Flashing Red Battery is not charging Battery fault En Note Battery charging continues whether the hand held is switched on or off
219. es and the card is ejected from the slot 60 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 3 11 3 11 1 3 11 2 A Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO General Maintenance General Maintenance Caring For The Touchscreen The top of the touchscreen is a thin flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic or crack the internal conductive coating The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen sodium hydroxide concentrated caustic solutions e benzyl alcohol and concentrated acids If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments consider applying a disposable screen pro tector WA6111 G2 These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen When they become scratched and abraded they are easily removed and replaced Cleaning The WORKABOUT PRO Important Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean e Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand held unit e Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals The plastic is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasol
220. es supported 2D PDF417 MicroPDF417 MaxiCode Data Matrix QR Code Aztec Aztec Mesa Code 49 UCC Composite Linear Code 39 Code 128 Codabar UPC EAN Inter leaved 2 of 5 RSS Code 93 Codablock Postal Postnet US Planet Code BPO 4 State Canadian Post Japanese Post KIX Netherlands Post Size 1 78cm Depth x 2 79cm Width without mounting tabs x 1 21cm Height 0 7 in Depth x 1 1 in Width without mounting tabs x 0 475 in Height Weight 5 9 grams 21 ounces Operational Input Voltage Imager 3 3 VDC 5 23 C Illumination Aimer 5300 3 0 VDC to 5 5 VDC 23 C Current Draw Imager Operating Current 100 mA Standby Current 100 pA Operating Temperature 30 to 50 C 34 to 122 F Storage Temperature 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Humidity up to 95 RH non condensing at 122 F 50 C Shock 18 shocks of 3 500 G for 0 5 msec at 23 C 73 F WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 245 Chapter 7 Specifications HHP5180 Imager 7 5 5 1 HHP5180 Imager Decode Performance Focal Point SR 7 inches 17 8 cm from lens plate SF 4 5 inches 11 4 cm from lens plate 8 3 mil 10 mil 15 mil Data 35 mil E Linear PDF417 T a wa y Matrix au pes Maxicode s 020 cm 025 cm 038 cm 6 089 cm Near 3 5 in 3 1 in 2 1 in 2 3 in 2 1 in 2 0 in 8 9 cm 7 9 cm 5 3cm 5 8 cm 7 9 cm 5 1 cm Far 7 6 in 9 in 13
221. eset and tap on the Activate button Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset Highlight a preset and tap on the View button The associated preset window is displayed Camera Presets lok Preset Default E Image Corrections W Auto Exposure E Manual Exposure E Windowing Predefined settings are read only Tap on the sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an ex isting custom preset To create a custom preset Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button A screen like the sample following is displayed Preset Name Cloning fram set Default Enter alphanumeric string o Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box e Tap on OK to save your changes The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 9 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Modifying a Custom Preset E 4 5 Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset To change a parameter value Highlight the custom preset and tap
222. essages Scan Indicator 749 scanner warning message 149 Scan Result 49 Micro PDF 417 D 18 35 D 57 Minimum Cancel Time D 3 D 20 D 42 vi Index WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Minimum Length 22 23 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 40 41 D 44 D 46 D 49 D 51 D 52 D 53 D 55 Minimum Size D 9 modifier keys 45 locking 46 One Shots Mode 700 unlocking 46 Motion Predefined preset E 4 mounting partitions 44 MSI Plessey D 14 28 D 51 N name servers assigning 22 name servers assigning Summit 26 network AdHoc 17 infrastructure 17 network authentication 18 Network Key assigning 8 NOTIS Editing D 4 numeric keyboard alpha keys accessing 49 uppercase letters creating 50 O Off amp On buttons 45 On amp Offbutton 45 One Check Digit D 5 29 one dimensional internal scanner 206 One Shots Mode 00 ON For 100 Open network authentication 8 Options parameters bar codes 148 Output Telepen 37 P pairing Bluetooth devices 57 122 Parameter Scanning D 3 23 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 40 41 D 43 D 44 D 45 D 46 D 49 D 51 D 52 D 53 D 55 Parity 155 157 partitions creating 141 formatting 143 management 142 mounting 144 PC connecting WORKABOUT to 190 PC linking to WORKABOUT 30 PDF and linear Predefined preset E 3 PDF 417 D 18 34 D 57 Pharmaceutical 22 phone dialing 31 Phonebook 35 Phone Dialericon 55 phone number di
223. etwork and Dial up Connections window allows you to configure the WORK ABOUT PRO radio or execute an existing configuration Refer to Configuring the Summit RA2041 802 11b g on page 24 for radio setup details Taskbar And Start Menu The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialog box in which you can customize the taskbar choosing which options will be displayed Refer to Customizing the Taskbar on page 70 for additional details about this option Run Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can enter the name of the program folder or document you want to open or launch aa Type the name of a program folder or document and Windows will open it for you Open WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 79 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Shutdown 4 4 7 80 Shutdown The Shutdown menu includes these options Suspend Warm Reset and Cold Reset A ar a My Device My Docurnents J ae Programs gt F Shortcuts gt 7 Settings gt Z Run ap Suspend a co Warm Reset qe 8 cold Reset Note This menu varies slightly depending on the security level chosen When the WORK ABOUT PRO is set to User level the Shutdown option is replaced by Suspend A sub menu is not available Suspend The Suspend option suspends the WORKABOUT PRO immediately This is equivalent to turning the hand held off Warm Reset When you perform
224. evice to view options TORPSG 011 Serial COMA gt WORKABOUTPRO O Query services Remove ilb This is a service dependent menu that is it varies slightly depending on the service chosen in the Servers tab Refer to Servers Tab on page 124 for more details Query Services and Remove Commands Note The Query Services and Remove commands are available in all service dependent menus regardless of the type of service chosen e Query Services displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen e Remove unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab OBEX OPP Object Exchange Object Push Profile Commands The OPP defines two roles a Push Server and a Push Client Push Server is the device that provides an object exchange server Push Client is the device that pushes and pulls objects to and from the Push Server OBEX OPP contains the following unique menu option Send File displays an Open File dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected When the transmission begins another dialog box tracks the progress of the file transmission HSP HFP Headset Profile Hands Free Profile Service Commands The HSP Headset Profile allows users to connect their device to Bluetooth enabled head sets and other audio devices HSP HFP services provide the following unique menu options WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 119 Chapter 5 Configuration Device Tab e C
225. fected by UPC A pro gramming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Conv UPC E1 To UPC A This parameter converts UPC E1 zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A pro gramming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details UPC EAN Shared Settings The parameters you set here are a shared across all available UPC and EAN bar codes Enable Bookland EAN Setting this parameter to on allows your scanner to recognize Bookland EAN bar codes Supplementals Supplementals are additionally appended characters 2 or 5 Double tapping this parameter displays a list of options If Ignore is chosen UPC EAN is decoded and the supplemental characters are ignored If Decode is chosen UPC EAN symbols are decoded with supplementals Autodiscriminate works in conjunction with the Supp Redundancy parameter Supp Redundancy With Autodiscriminate selected in the Supplementals parameter Supp Redundancy adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value between 2 and 20 A value of 5 or above is recommended when Autodiscriminate is selected and you are decoding a mix of UPC EAN symbols with and without supplementals D 1
226. figuration Keyboard Properties Important Once you ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key you need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection Lock If you choose Lock from the drop down menu pressing a modifier key once locks it on until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off OneShot If you choose OneShot the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed OneShot Lock OneShot Lock allows you to combine these functions When you choose this option and you press the modifier key once it remains active only until the next key is pressed If you press the modifier key twice it is locked on remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it off Keyboard Macro Keys Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Macros tab Macro Key Sequence A macro has 200 programmable characters or positions The macro keys can be pro grammed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executable keys including ENTER BKSP and DEL FN BLUE BKSP function keys and arrow keys WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 101 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties 102 Recording and Saving a Macro Macro keys are only available on WORKABOUT PRO C units You can program up to 10 macro keys on the WORKABOUT PRO C In the Macro menu hig
227. figured here Voice The Voice tab is described in detail in Chapter 2 Basic Checkout on page 16 B 16 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 2 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Power Mode Power Mode The power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power menu in the Control Panel not through the Wireless WAN user interface For CF Card modems the settings are found under the Devices tab If the checkbox for a modem is unchecked no power is applied to the modem and no driver is loaded neither the serial port driver nor the Wireless WAN driver If the checkbox is checked power is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the computer is turned on Power is removed from the modem when the computer enters suspend mode WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 17 APPENDIX C SUMMIT CLIENT UTILITY SCU This appendix provides details about each tab in the Summit Client Utility SCU For quick step by step setup instructions refer to Configuring the Summit RA2041 802 11b g on page 24 C 1 SCU Tabs This section provides a detailed description of each of the tabs available in the SCU Main below Profile page C 2 Status page C 7 Diags page C 7 and Global Settings page C 8 C 2 Main Tab The Main tab is displayed when you tap on Start gt Programs gt SCU icon TUES 2 Por Main Profile Status Diags Global Auto Profle
228. figured time between 0 to 1000 milliseconds a double click occurs See also Trigger Press Type on page 139 Show All Modules By default the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings Mappings for drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed By checking this checkbox all mappings both active and inactive are displayed Add Tapping this button brings up the Add mapping dialog see Add and Edit Trigger Mapping on page 138 so that you can add new trigger mappings Edit Tapping this button brings up the Edit mapping dialog see Add and Edit Trigger Mapping on page 138 so that you can edit existing trigger mappings Remove Tapping this button removes an existing mapping OK The OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made If the cancel button X is tapped instead or the ESC key is pressed all changes made will be discarded WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 137 Chapter 5 Configuration Add and Edit Trigger Mapping 5 13 2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping These dialogs allow the user to add and edit trigger mappings Add Mapping Trigger key soft Scan y Add Key Trigger press type Up Down Double click Module to trigger C Show all modules Su 537 4 Trigger Key This drop down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events such as the Grip Trigger Left Scan etc fo
229. figured using the Teklogix Scanners applet the changes are also made in the My Default preset My Default automatically becomes the active bar code symbology preset None of the other bar code decoding predefined presets is changed Configuring Symbologies in the My Default Preset When My Default is the active preset In this case the changes to the symbology configuration are also made in the Teklogix Scan ners applet When My Default is not the active preset In this case the changes to the symbology configuration are not made in the Teklogix Scan ners applet Filter Tab Manipulating Bar Code Data To configure rules for manipulating bar code data Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel E 14 WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Filter Tab Manipulating Bar Code Data Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon and then tap on the Filter tab PTS Imager Settings Imaging Barcoding Filter Transla Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E Code 93 Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 RSS Code 2D PDF 417 E E E E E E E E E double click E 4 14 1 Modifying a Bar Code Setting The rules for manipulating data from selected bar code symbologies can be modified To change the settings for a symbology Field Size Prefix Suffix and Strip Chars E To change
230. generally con sidered depleted after approximately 2 years of use less than 60 of original capacity remaining Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the unit at temperature ex tremes will shorten the battery life Lithium Ion batteries do not require conditioning cycles and the WORKABOUT PRO battery system including chargers requires no user interaction to maintain peak performance WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 55 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Storing Batteries 3 7 1 3 56 8 A To maximize the run time of your batteries consider the following The display backlight is the largest drain on the battery Try to keep its brightness as low as possible e The hand held is event driven that is when the unit is not in use it reverts to sleep mode even when it appears to be running saving battery power Events include a key press touchscreen taps and scan triggers Power consumption is reduced if you avoid unnecessary events and allow the unit to sleep as much as possible The battery is a smart battery with built in intelligence Tapping on the Power icon in the Control Panel displays a dialog box that provides detailed information about the battery status of the main and backup batteries installed in your unit e When the hand held is switched off it goes into a low power suspend state but contin ues to draw a small amount of power from the battery Th
231. gix Imagers Applet E 14 E 4 14 Filter Tab Manipulating Bar Code Data 0 0 cece eee e eee E 14 E 4 15 Translation Tab Configuring Rules 00 cece cece eee rreren E 16 E4 16 Advanced Tabs ncse22 305 0 8aceccnd cada covvves eens eCo spessereeeesesaee s E 17 E S Teklogix Scanners Applet 0 00 ccc cee ccc eee ete eee rr rr E 18 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 About This Mama 3 1 2 Text Conventos 4 1 3 WORKABOUT PRO Features ee 4 1 4 The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand Held 0 ee 6 1 5 The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand Held 2 7 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 1 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction About This Manual About This Manual This manual describes how to configure operate and maintain the Psion Teklogix WORK ABOUT PRO hand held computer Chapter 1 Introduction provides a basic overview of the WORKABOUT PRO hand held Chapter 2 Basic Checkout describes the steps required to get the WORKABOUT PRO ready for operation including setting up your RA2041 802 11b g and the RA2043 801 11 a b g radios This chapter also describes how to use the phone dialer Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO describes the WORKABOUT PRO features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery This chapter also provides a description of the keyboard how to navigate in Micro soft Windows CE 5 0 and so on Chapter 4
232. gth that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from to 12 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details RSS Code Enable RSS 14 Reduced Space Symbology RSS 14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the other half Stacking the code reduces the bar code length and providing the nominal height of the code is maintained it can be omni directionally scanned Enable RSS Limited RSS Limited is restricted in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs global trade item number that begin with either a 0 or a It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni directionally Enable RSS Expanded RSS Expanded uses the same application identifiers as UCC EAN 128 codes but it can be split into sections and stacked several rows high reducing the length of the symbol while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored RSS Expanded code can be omni direc tionally scanned Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Da
233. he Active Profile drop down menu your new profile will be listed in the drop down menu When you tap on the profile you created the RA2041 radio module attempts to connect to the network using the following steps 1 Associate with SSID 2 Authenticate to network 3 If EAP authentication is being used derive dynamic encryption keys 4 IfDHCP is being used by the network obtain an IP address If the RA2041 is not connecting properly Tap on the Status tab The Status dialog box lists the JP and MAC addresses and indicates the current state of the radio the signal strength channel and so on You can also use the Status screen for DHCP renewal and ICMP Echo Requests Pings AN Important For details about the Status dialog box refer to Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU page C 7 2 6 Checking the Scanner If your WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with an internal scanner you can test it to ensure that it is operating properly Point the scanner window at a bar code that your scanner was designed to decode for example a 1D UPC bar code or 2D bar code Press the SCAN key or pistol trigger and check for a valid decode on the hand held s screen Performance is improved if you disable all unneeded bar codes in the Bar Codes screen Review Teklogix Scanner Settings beginning on page 146 and Appendix D Bar Code Settings for details about bar codes 2 7 Connecting the WORKABOUT PRO to a PC En Not
234. he new back plate onto the WORKABOUT PRO using the supplied screws PN 9009770 e Switch on the internal power switch in the battery compartment Insert the battery and install the battery compartment cover Installing the Flush Mount Pistol Grip The Flush Mount Pistol Grip model WA6103 is intended for use with second generation WORKABOUT PRO units models 7527C G2 and 7527S G2 which have the Trigger Back Plate installed Review the first few paragraphs at the beginning of The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip on page 176 for a list of compatible scanners imagers A Important Back up any data in RAM before you begin data are erased when the inter nal power of the WORKABOUT PRO is turned off If your unit is using AC power disconnect it e Remove the battery cover and battery pack Switch off the internal power the switch is located inside the battery compartment WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 179 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip e Remove the screw on cap if present from the switch in the middle of the back plate Battery Pack Cover Screws 4 X e Lower the Flush Mount Pistol Grip into place over the back plate aligning the screw inserts on the hand held with the screw holes in the pistol grip Insert and tighten the four screws provided with the pistol
235. heck digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology Enable Setting this parameter to on enables RSS Code scanning capability Enable RSS 14 RSS 14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the other half Stacking the code reduces the bar code length and providing the nominal height of the code is maintained it can be omni directionally scanned Enable RSS Limited RSS Limited is restricted in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs global trade item number that begin with either a 0 or a 1 It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni directionally Enable RSS Expanded RSS Expanded uses the same application identifiers as UCC EAN 128 codes but they can be split into sections and stacked several rows high reducing the length of the symbol while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored RSS Expanded code can be omni directionally scanned Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 55 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Composite D 4 19 A D 4 20 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Composite Important To successfully read this type of bar code the two types of sym
236. hlight a macro key number for example macro 1 to assign a macro to macro key M1 Choose the Record button A message screen is displayed instructing you to Enter Key Strokes to Record Keyboard Properties One Shots Macros Unicode Mapp Macro Key Sequence Enter Key Strokes to Record To stop press the button or CTRL ALT Enter Stop Recording Record Delete alar SH le e Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key You can type text and numbers and you can program the function of special keys into a macro e When you ve finished recording your macro sequence press the key sequence CTRL ALT ENTER or choose the Stop Recording button A new screen called Verify Macro displays the macro sequence you created The Save button is highlighted e Press ENTER to save your macro or tap on the Cancel button to discard it Executing a Macro To execute a macro e Press the macro key to which you ve assigned the macro For example if you created a macro for macro key 1 press M1 to execute the macro Deleting a Macro To delete a macro WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties In the Macros tab highlight the macro number you want to delete Tap on the Delete button 5 5 3 6 Unicode Mapping Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Unicode Mapping tab Keyboard Properties OK Unicode Mapping
237. ia the SDK function instead of a physical user trigger press The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec default is 3 sec Scan Log File If this parameter is enabled the input barcode and the modified translated output bar code are logged in the file Flash Disk ScanLog txt Keep in mind that if the Scan Log File is enabled there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 149 Chapter 5 Configuration Translations Tab 5 16 3 3 Data Handling This option allows you to choose the code page your WORKABOUT PRO will use to display data Default Local ASCII or ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 Codepage Tapping on this option displays a window in which you can define the code page your WORKABOUT PRO will use 150 8859 1 Latin 1 If you choose Default Local ASCH the code page of the local OS is used For example if the local OS uses double byte Chinese characters choosing this option will filter data through the local ASCII of that OS and display it accurately in this example using double byte characters If you choose SO 8859 1 Latin 1 data will be displayed according to the character mapping of this Latin 1 code page ignoring the local OS code page 5 16 4 Translations Tab The Translations tab allows you to define up to 10 cases each consisting of up to 10
238. id red Battery is outside ambient temperature range of 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F Flashing red Charge alarm indicating a charging circuit problem Refer to Troubleshooting on page 196 for details Flashing red then green in a 3 Power up test sequence second cycle EN Note Battery charging continues whether the hand held is switched on or off 6 18 Quad Battery Charger Model WA3004 G1 The quad battery charger is designed to charge up to four Lithium Ion batteries at one time Note The gang charger is shipped with a user manual It is critical that this manual be reviewed for additional information and updates WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 195 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Charging Batteries 6 18 1 6 18 2 6 18 3 6 18 4 Charging Batteries Slide the battery into a charge well aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the charge well Battery Charge Duration A fully discharged battery can take up to 4 hours to charge The quad battery charger stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge well The 75 charge indicator is handy if you need a quick recharge a quick charge often takes less than one hour Charge Indicators The LEDs Each battery charge well is equipped with an LED to indicate the charge status of the bat tery When a
239. ified all the necessary information choose the Finish button 11 In the Control Panel choose the Dialing icon 12 The values in the Dialing Properties dialog box need to be edited according to your network carrier specifications New Remove Local settings are Area code fa25 Tone dialing Country Region fi O Pulse dialing J Disable call waiting dial gt Dialing patterns ae Local Long Distance International 9 6 9 1FG 9 011 EFG Once you ve edited this dialog box to reflect your network carrier requirements press ENTER to save your changes 13 At this point you 11 need to return to the Control Panel and choose the Network and Dial up Connections icon WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 129 Chapter 5 Configuration Certificate Assignment 14 In the network connection window the new network configuration in this case New Connection is displayed Tap on the new icon Connection aa Call When you tap on your new connection an onscreen message indicates the status of your connection connected disconnected error messages and so on 5 7 Certificate Assignment e Inthe Control Panel choose the Certificate icon P y gt Certificates This option is used in conjunction with 802 1x authentication to enhance WORKABOUT PRO security Lists the certificates trusted by you Class 2 Public a
240. ig ures the imager for a specific purpose such as bar code decoding or image capture Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power on or resume from suspend The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements A custom preset can be created for a specific user application such as include only WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 1 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Predefined Presets E 2 1 E 2 2 E 2 2 1 specified bar codes read only a specified number of bar codes or for reading unusual media Every preset belongs to a preset type The following preset types are available Imaging for photo capture Imaging for bar code decoding e Symbology selection At any time only one preset of each type can be designated as the user selected active preset Predefined Presets Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed The pre defined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to understand and set numerous variables In almost all cases these predefined presets are sufficient Bar Code Predefined Presets These presets encompass the majority ofthe most popular bar codes and their subtypes The bar code decoding symbology predefined presets define which bar codes can be decoded The bar code decoding camera predefined presets determine how the bar code images are captured Bar Code Decodi
241. iguration App Launch The App Launch screen is displayed Key 000 Data e To assign an application key tap on the Add button RRE FEN Press the key s you want to use to launch an application If an unsupported key is pressed a message appears on this screen letting you know WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 93 Chapter 5 Configuration App Launch 94 Once you ve chosen the App key s the Select File to Map screen is displayed so that you can choose the App you want to assign to the key s you ve specified Select File to Map ok x fx Programs y Name O Activesync Folder Demo Folder Summit Folder M command Prompt Ink internet Explorer wink Phone Ink S Remote Connect Ink a Windows Explorer Ink as qial e Choose an application from this screen Once you ve highlighted the App tap on OK Add New Mapping Key shift 1 App fs Microsoft WordPad Ink al ea a acia orf x The cursor moves to the Data field You can use this field if you need to define special pa rameters to your application launch key If you don t want to assign any parameters you can leave the Data field blank If for example you want to assign an application launch key to launch the WordPad application you can leave this field blank If you want to assign an ap plication launch key that will open a specific document in the WordPad application you nee
242. ind that because the processor continues to run Standby mode consumes more power than Suspend mode Calibrating the Touchscreen Note Keep in mind that the touchscreen function can be turned off see Touch on page 117 The WORKABOUT PRO touchscreen is factory calibrated and ready to go however over time the touchscreen operating parameters may change and may need to be recalibrated for correct operation Refer to Calibration on page 116 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 13 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring the 802 11a b g RA2043 Compact Flash Radio 2 4 Configuring the 802 1 1a b g RA2043 Compact Flash Radio Once the RA2043 802 1 1a b g compact flash radio is installed in the WORKABOUT PRO you ll need to take a few steps to configure the radio While most common settings are con figured as defaults there are some fields that must be completed including the SSID of your access point and the security methods implemented in the network including access keys nN Note In most cases the configuration of your 802 11 radio will require parameters set tings and access keys from a network administrator Network administrators should review the detailed security information in this sec tion in order to effectively configure the 802 11 wireless network Tap on the Start button in the taskbar and then tap on Settings gt Network and Dial up Connections or Tap on the radio icon in the task
243. indows CE 5 0 The Taskbar 4 3 2 2 e Choose System Tray in the sub menu e Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you d like more information e Press ENTER to display the appropriate dialog box Customizing the Taskbar To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require e Choose Start gt Settings gt Taskbar If you re using the keyboard e Press the Windows START button to display the Start menu Highlight the Settings option highlight Taskbar in the sub menu and press ENTER The Taskbar and Start Menu dialog box is displayed Taskbar and Start Menu OK General advanced Security M j 7 Auto hide 7 Show Clock Y Show active app Y Show Start button Y Show Input Panel button Taskbar General Tab Tap the stylus on the items you want to activate or deactivate The check mark indicates active items If you re using the keyboard Highlight the options you want to activate and press the SPACE key FN ORANGE 0 on the numeric keyboard to select them A check mark indicates active items 70 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 The Start Menu Taskbar Advanced Tab General Advanced Security Tr Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Documents Menu J Expand Control Panel Tap on the Clear button to empty the Documents folder
244. ine The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen use isopropyl alcohol WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 61 WORKING WITH WINDOWS CE 5 0 4 4 1 Navigating in Windows CE 5 0 0 0 0000 eee ee 65 4 1 1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus 4 65 4 1 2 Navigating Using the Keyboard 20 0004 eae 65 4 2 Working with Files Folders and Programs o o o o e 66 4 3 The Startup Desktop cs sisi ta Baa doe ee ie ad le 67 4 3 1 The Desktop cOnS s o resia a sae n na e e 68 4 3 2 The Taskbar lt serrio a nh PO eRe e a Ei RE EN 69 4 3 2 1 Using the Taskbar 69 4 3 2 2 Customizing the Taskbar 70 4 4 The Start Memes 4 43 2 io e ower ars 71 4 41 The Desktop sarii uiri aces as a a gd we eae a Sek ee 73 4 4 2 Security Settings a kk be hee a Pe ae a A 73 AA PLOMO ere ee fe eet ak eg S 75 4 4 4 Shortcuts ie is ale cere ha e a hee te Gt Seer hat Oe 77 AS A Bee ALS Be een dee 78 4 AGRON a hee a o oy se en SB a SA chs toch a RES tao 79 AAT Shutdown 40 3 4 A A eee BS Oey oh kere 80 4 5 Using a Dialog BOX eios ii a e e poese a a aadi aa Yoa a aaa a a a a a ai 81 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 63 4 1 El 4 1 1 4 1 2 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Navigating in Windows CE 5 0 Navigating in Windows CE 5
245. ion Windows Explorer The Windows Explorer installed on your WORKABOUT PRO is consistent with all Windows CE 5 0 devices You can access this option from the Start Menu under Pro grams gt Windows Explorer 76 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 4 4 4 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Shortcuts Shortcuts 4 a 2 My Device My Documents Recycle Bin Di esk n 2 Desktop bad Security o megas or G Shortcuts gt W System Tray p y Settings Cycle Tasks Run 5 Task Manager You can use the System Tray option to access the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal icon and the security level These indicators are attached to dialog boxes that provide additional information System Tray e Tap on Start gt Shortcuts gt System Tray Using the icons in the taskbar you can either display the Control Panel dialog box associ ated with an icon or you can view a fooltip A tooltip provides the status of each icon Tap and hold the stylus on an icon to display the icon s tooltip Double tap on the icon to open the Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon On the keyboard e Press START to display the Start Menu Highlight Shortcuts in the Start Menu and then press the RIGHT arrow key to display the sub menu e Choose System Tray in the sub menu e Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar a
246. ion Properties dialog box has buttons for additional functions Partitions can be defragmented and their file structure can be scanned Teklogix Imagers Settings The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create modify delete and activate imager settings The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images te gt Teklogix Imagers Note This icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your hand held computer WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Teklogix Imagers Settings To launch this applet tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and then tap on the Tek logix Imagers icon PTS Imager Settings OK x Imaging Barcoding Fitter Transi gt Camera Presets Default Motion R Low light near R Sottorn Colour Carry View Add Remove Activate R Read W Write A Active A Important Refer to Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet for details about this applet An Imager demo applet is also provided to illustrate how the imager works To launch the demo applet tap on Start gt Programs and then tap on the Imager icon tell PTS Imager WEE Settng olofx E 727 oe ee WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 145 Chapter 5 Configuration Teklogix Scanner Settings 5 16 Teklogix Scanner Settings The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides
247. ireless LAN logging all activity in the output area at bottom of the dialog box WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual C 7 Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU Global Settings Tab Release Renew Obtains a new IP address through DHCP and logs all activity in the output area Start Ping Starts a continuous ping to the address in the text box next to this button This is a toggle button so when you tap on it it changes to Stop Ping Closing this window or tapping on another button also stops the ping Diagnostics Attempts to connect or reconnect to an AP and provides a more detailed dump of data than if you used Re connect The dump includes the radio state profile settings global settings and BSSID list of APs The SCU is saved to a file called _sdc diag txt in the Windows directory C 6 Global Settings Tab Summit Client Utility fox x Main Profile Status Diags Global Property Aggressive Scan CCX features Auth Server TX Diversity Save Changes Changing this setting will reset LMM the connection Commit The Global Settings tab allows you to define radio and security settings that apply to all pro files along with settings that apply specifically to the SCU The Global Settings in the table below can be edited in the SCU Global Setting Description Value Default Roam Trigger If RSSI from AP is less than ro
248. is should not be an issue unless the unit is left in suspend state for more than a week for long term storage the battery should be removed from the unit Storing Batteries Long term battery storage is not recommended If storage is necessary e Always try to use a first in first out approach to minimize storage time Lithium Ion batteries age much faster at elevated temperatures Store batteries at tem peratures between 0 C and 20 C e Always charge batteries to at least 40 to 60 before storing them Batteries can be damaged by an over discharge phenomenon that occurs when an empty battery is stored for a long period of time such that the cell voltage drops below a lower limit To minimize storage degradation recharge stored batteries to 40 to 60 every 4 or 6 months to prevent over discharge damage A never used Li Ion battery that has been stored for 3 years may have limited or no useful life remaining once put into service Think of batteries as perishable goods Uploading Data In A Docking Station Important Review the documentation provided with the user application installed in your WORKABOUT PRO before performing data uploads The desktop docking station and quad docking station are typically used to upload transac tion data to a server computer when a radio link is not available WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual El 3 9 EL 3 9 1 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT P
249. isplayed in the Status field the Connect Data button is enabled Tap on the Connect Data button The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field PPP link to modem active e Authenticating user e User authenticated e Connected WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 3 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN EA Note Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the connection is rapid When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active the taskbar icon changes to in dicate an active connection The Connect Data button changes to Disconnect Disconnecting From A Network To disconnect from the network Tap the stylus on the Disconnect button and then on OK When the computer s network connection is severed the Status field displays Ready to connect The signal strength is displayed in the main Wireless WAN screen even while a connection is active The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields estimate the amount of data transmitted and re ceived respectively Shutting Down The Wireless WAN User Interface While it is not usual to shut down the GSM GPRS user interface you can accomplish this by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command at the bottom of the main Wire less WAN dialog box Note Once you ve shut down the user interface you can only enable the radio by opening the Control Panel and tapping on the Wir
250. it is displayed in lowercase letters in the taskbar at the bottom of the hand held screen For example if the CTRL key is pressed ctrl key is dis played at the bottom of the unit screen Once the next key is pressed the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar Keep in mind however that the One Shot function allows you to determine how many key presses will lock a modifier key on one press or two Refer to Keyboard One Shots Mode on page 100 for details 3 4 1 2 Locking Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed twice it is locked on A locked modifier key is displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar For example pressing the CTRL key twice locks it on it is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off Once a modifier key is unlocked the uppercase representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed 3 4 2 The Keys The SHIFT Key The SHIFT key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and provide access to the symbols above the numeric keys The Arrow Keys The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow up down left and right The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear The SPACE Key Pressing this key inserts a
251. ith a fully charged backup battery User Interface e Color Touch Screen Display 3 6 in 9 144 cm diagonal Full VGA Display with Adjustable Resolution QVGA or VGA Transflective portrait mode TFT Adjustable Backlight e Touchscreen Passive stylus or finger operation Signature capture e Keyboards Full Alpha Numeric C model Numeric S model QWERTY S model Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous one hand operation Backlit high durability hard capped keys Wireless Communication Optional expansion modules for e 802 11b g Compact Flash Radio operating in the 2 4GHz band e 802 11a b g Compact Flash Radio with integrated antenna operating in 2 4GHz and 5GHz bands e GSM GPRS EDGE via expansion interface WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 Chapter 1 Introduction The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand Held Quad Band 850 900 1800 1900 Voice and Data UMTS HSDPA via expansion interface Triple band 850 1900 2100MHz Voice and Data Integrated Bluetooth class II V 2 0 EDR AN Note 802 11b g GSM and Bluetooth are available simultaneously 1 4 The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand Held Figure 1 1 WORKABOUT PRO C with Alpha Keyboard P siOlN TEKLOGIX 6 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand Held 1 5 The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand Held Figure 1 2 WORKABOUT PRO S with Numeric Keyboard worhebout Pro WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User
252. keup tab Power Properties 114 warm reset 37 Warm Reset Shutdown menu 80 warnings 149 WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy 17 goea Index Windows Start Menu See Start Menu 71 Windows CE dialog box 8 files folders amp programs working with 66 Windows CE navigating in 65 Windows Explorer 75 Windows Zero Config WZC C 6 Wireless Information Tab 16 Wireless Properties tab 17 Wireless Statistics Tab 15 Wireless WAN B 1 B 17 SMS Configuration B 16 Voice B 16 Wireless WAN icon 55 WPA and WPA2 authentication 18 WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK authentication 18 WZC Windows Zero Config C 6 1D internal scanner 206 2D Aztec 38 2D Data Matrix 37 2D imager scanner 207 2D Maxicode 37 2D QR Code 37 2D Raster Expand Rate D 5 2D UPC Half Block Stitching D 3 802 1X authentication enabling 79 802 1la g b radio 216 802 11b g radio 2 6 802 11g radio configuring 14 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual XI
253. king Station Setup After unpacking the unit e Visually inspect the unit for any damage Install the IEC power cord and apply power A green indicator in the lower right corner of the front panel lights up to indicate that power is present e Attach a CATS RJ45 network patch cable supplied between your network and the RJ45 jack on the rear of the dock A green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector when a valid network link is established 198 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 6 19 2 6 19 3 6 19 4 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Quad Indicators A user application must be loaded onto each WORKABOUT PRO that utilizes the quad dock for communication When the network is connected and this application is loaded the quad dock is ready for use Quad Indicators The quad dock is equipped with a power indicator LED and RJ45 link and traffic indicator LEDs When a valid network link is established a green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector Inserting a WORKABOUT PRO in the Quad Docking Station Slide the WORKABOUT PRO into the cradle portion of the quad dock until lightly latched The hand held detects that it is in a quad dock and momentarily displays the appropriate icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen Y The LED on the hand held unit lights up to show it has external power and may start charg ing the battery Interaction with the WORKABOUT PRO
254. l The Device pop up menu allows you to pair a device update a device name or delete a device from the list Pair begins the pairing process by inquiring the services and profiles of the discovered device An authentication dialog box is displayed the first time a Bluetooth device is paired WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 121 Chapter 5 Configuration Device Tab Refresh Name repeats the device name inquiry updating the name This command is useful if a device is listed without a name unknown or if a device name has been changed remotely Delete removes this device from the list 5 6 2 4 Pairing a Device To pair devices e Follow the manufacturer s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode e Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area e When the scan is complete tap on the device to which you want to pair In the pop up Device menu tap on Pair An Authentication dialog box is displayed Authentication Enter a passcode to establish a secure connection To proceed without authentication press Next Passcode Cancel Next E Dubi Ifthe remote device has authentication enabled type the PIN in this dialog box e To proceed without authentication tap on Next Note If a remote device has authentication enabled and you ve skipped the authentication process a pop up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to the WORKABOU
255. le Trioptic Code 39 Note Trioptic Code 39 and Full ASCII should not be enabled simultaneously The scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters Setting this parameter to on allows this type of symbology to be recognized D 6 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 39 Convert To Code 32 N Note Code 39 must be enabled in order for this parameter to function Setting this parameter to on allows the scanner to convert the bar code from Code 39 to Code 32 Code 32 Prefix EN Note Convert to Code 32 must be enabled in order for this parameter to function When this parameter is enabled the prefix character A is added to all Code 32 bar codes Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for Code 39 can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be decoded by your scanner O One discrete length O Iwo discrete lengths Enter value s from 2 to 55 P to fs To change a setting press space or double click Choosing One discrete length allows you
256. lso been configured for the same source it will only receive the first set of trigger events Module Trigger This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses Show All Modules By default inactive owners are not shown By checking this checkbox all owners both active and inactive are displayed WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 139 Chapter 5 Configuration Storage Manager 5 14 5 14 1 Storage Manager The Storage Manager allows the user to view information about the storage devices that are present in the WORKABOUT PRO such as SD MMC flash cards and Compact Flash cards 2 Storage Manager Formatting a Memory Card Formatting a memory card bulk erases it Once a card is erased partitions may be created in it similarly to those on a hard drive Memory card devices are normally mounted made available to the system automatically when they are inserted They must be dismounted before they can be formatted To format an entire memory card 1 Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel 2 In Control Panel double click on the Storage Manager icon Figure 5 3 Storage Manager Screen Storage Properties ok Storage Manager Store Info psK2 SD Memory Car y Capacity 121 25 MB Unallocated 0 00 B Sector Size 512 00 B Format Dismount Properties 3 Choose the memory card from the drop down list 4 Tap on the Dismo
257. ly Typically when both radios operate in the hand held at the same time they cannot transmit simultane ously this has a negative impact on overall system throughput To minimize the impact on the backbone 802 11g network Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates such as printers and scanners Refer to Bluetooth Setup on page 117 for information about setting up your Bluetooth devices for communication In addition review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to pair with the WORKABOUT PRO host WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual SPECIFICATIONS 7 7 1 WORKABOUT PRO Specifications o oo ee 211 7 2 Radio Specifications ee 216 7 2 1 Model RA2041 802 11 b g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS 216 7 2 2 Model RA2043 802 11a b g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS 216 7 2 3 Model RA3030 G2 GSM GPRS EDGE Radio 217 7 2 4 Model RA3040 G2 Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem 218 TB USO ee a a St a Tea MG Bade br ae ete 220 73 Battery Specifications a ni o cee a eae ae ed EE ia G 221 7 3 1 High Capacity Model WA3006 0 002005 221 7 3 1 1 Electrical Specifications 2 0 0 20000 221 7 3 1 2 Battery Pack Electrical Specifications 221 7 3 1 3 Standard Discharge 223 7 314 Safety Data aii a id rata 225 1
258. main battery to protect the data stored in the unit until a charged main battery is installed WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 11 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off 2 2 2 2 1 A Note The backup battery takes approximately 3 to 4 hours to fully charge from a fully dis charged flat state generally the same amount of time it takes to fully charge the main battery While you can continue to use the WORKABOUT PRO replacing the main battery while the backup battery is not fully charged is not recommended because you risk losing the data stored on the unit Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On Important Press and hold down the Power button until the Shutdown screen is dis played Choose Suspend and tap on OK before removing the battery To unlock the battery cover turn the left hand battery fastener to the left and turn the right hand battery fastener to the right e Remove the battery cover Ensure that the ON OFF switch in the battery compartment is set to ON before inserting the battery Snap the charged battery into the unit Replace the battery cover and lock the fasteners in place Note Ifyou are using a docking station or an external power supply you can insert an uncharged battery and switch it on To switch on the WORKABOUT PRO e Press and hold down the Power button for at least one s
259. me And Sound Properties 0 0 0 cece ccc e eee e eee ee eee eeneeenes 108 5 5 5 Power Management Properties 00 cece eee eee e eee eeeeeeeneeeaes 110 5 56 Stylus Properties coi aii 116 Bluetooth SQUID AAA TR ARA AA 117 S6 Pared Tab dad 118 36 21 Deyic Taba es ARAS es ARRRRRRARR id 120 5 0 3 Servers ADA AE AAA 124 Sid Mode Taba E oa 125 A 1 Il ARA E OA 125 5 6 6 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection 0 cece cece eee een e een e eens 126 Certificate Assignment iad aa aea ER EE EE aa iN A 130 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual iii iv Contents 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 15 5 16 5 18 COM Port Manara e ERAN wleles 131 Dr Debug o 5055 Aa i 132 SOT Stats RRE ON RRA 132 59 2 Settings Prosi i er ices ELE E OnE ENEE A EEE EEKE KS EEs 133 5 93 Utilities in II AAA AI NANNA 133 EOL RE DOTA oe ae Utd dtd ttle AO 134 Internet Options prann EE EEEE E a a sees EEEE EEEE SESS 134 IPVOSUPPOM sca a a RRA A e nA EAA LAE AAE ee sos 4 135 Manage rr ais 135 5 1331 Trigger Mappings s 2202 3 62 cnandeagaangigadiace A RRA RAR eS 136 5 13 2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping oocoocccconccccnncnnncnnnnrrr nr 138 Storage Manasers romana ta a note EEEE EEEE EERE E AAEE 140 5 14 1 Formatting a Memory Card 0 0 00 cece ccc eee eee e eee e rr 140 514 2 Creating Partitions cit rro 141 5 14 3 Partition Properties accio i 142 Teklogix Imagers Settings a iin a a EEE
260. midity 5 to 95 non condensing Operating Current Scanning current 210 mA typical 240 mA max Motor on current 150 mA typical 170 mA max Standby cur rent 60 uA Operating Temperature 22 to 140 F 30 to 60 C chassis temperature Power Supply Voltage Input voltage 3 3 VDC 10 Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 7 Specifications SE1524ER Scanner Specifications 7 5 2 1 SE1524 Scanner Decode Zone Decode Zonos for SE 1524ER wW in cm i Note Typical performance at 7S 4 F 23 C 12 305 E on high quality symbols 8 23 n 2 4 102 o 0 0 t 4 102 a 203 f 12 35 e i d 50 15 08 mo 5 0 gone 560 n o 20 50 80 100 em o 50 8 101 5 1524 203 2 254 0 Depth of Fiet w n cm l Note Typical performance at 73 4 F 23 C 72 1829 on high quality symbols PR 48 1219 M 24 60 0 0 1 24 610 z 28 1219 1 So 72 1829 15 0 e a I man d 70 ml reflective 367 0 r 100 m retiectve 15420 n o 120 240 360 430 600 cm o 3045 605 6 314 4 12192 1524 0 Depth of Field Near range determined by degree of re ectvty and width of bar code WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 241 Chapter 7 Specifications EV15 Imager Specifications 7 5 3 EV15 Imager Specifications Parameter EV15 Light Source 617nm Highly Visible LED Scan Angle 40 Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 25 Min x Dimensi
261. mit 802 11b g radio model number RA2041 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 75 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Programs Command Prompt Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt At the prompt you can type DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive Imager This applet is used to create modify delete and activate imager settings The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images Keep in mind that this option is only listed if an imager is installed in your unit Internet Explorer The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows CE 5 0 You can access the Internet Explorer either by tapping on Start gt Programs gt Internet Ex plorer or by tapping on the Internet Explorer icon on the desktop Microsoft WordPad Microsoft WordPad is a rich text editor included with Microsoft Windows CE This application is a subset of Microsoft Word application you can use to create edit and save documents Phone Tapping on this option launches the Phone Dialer Refer to Voice Using the Phone Dialer on page 31 for details Remote Connect Remote Connect is a WORKABOUT PRO application used to connect to a Windows Ter minal Server so that you can run a session on the Server machine using the WORKABOUT PRO Windows CE 5 0 device Remote Connect on page 87 provides a website with details about this opt
262. msec 200 msec or 400 msec A value of 0 zero disables the target dot Aim Duration This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser begins sweeping When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 30 0 to 3 sec A value of 0 zero disables the aiming dot Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 5 and 99 each number representing 0 1 D 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 2 2 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Advanced Options Decoded Internal Advanced Options Decoded Internal Continuous Scan Mode Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off once the scanner trigger or button is released This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly triggers on off Power Mode This parameter is a power saving option Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power mode options Continuous Power and Low Power In Continuous Power mo
263. n StartUp ceconfig h cemgrc exe cerdisp2 exe i File 66 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 4 3 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 The Startup Desktop Double tap on the appropriate icon either a folder icon a program icon or a file icon to open or launch your selection If you re using the keyboard e Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon you want to open or launch e Press ENTER The Startup Desktop When the WORKABOUT PRO boots up the startup desktop shell is displayed Any ap plications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately nN Note The startup folder is located in Windows StartUp and Flash Disk StartUp Figure 4 2 The WORKABOUT PRO Startup Desktop 2 ay L 2 My Device My Documents o 2 de Recycle Bin e Desktop a Internet Explorer pS i9 Microsoft WordPad To access desktop icons Double tap on the icon to open a window or in the case of an application icon launch an application On the keyboard e Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon and press ENTER to launch the highlighted icon Note If the arrow keys do not highlight the desktop icons the desktop may not be selected Press FN BLUE period to display the Start Menu and select Desktop Now the desktop will be in focus and the arrow keys will highlight the icons WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 67 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5
264. n page C 2 EAP Type To configure authentication and encryption use the appropriate drop down menus in the Profile dialog box and enter credentials for IEEE 802 1X EAP types or WEP keys by tapping on the Credentials button just below the drop down menus Tap on the EAP type drop down menu and choose the appropriate type of authentica tion LEAP EAP FAST PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC and EAP_TLS Once you ve chosen an EAP type tap on the Credentials button and type credentials for IEEE 802 1X EAP types Important Refer to Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU under the Profile Tab beginning on page C 2 for details about EAP Type and Encryption security settings Encryption To configure encryption e Tap on the Encryption drop down menu and choose the appropriate type of encryption Manual WEP Auto WEP WPA PSK WPA TKIP WPA2 PSK WPA2 AES CCKM TKIP CKIP Manual or CKIP Auto If you choose Manual WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Tap on the WEP PSK Keys button For Manual WEP choose up to four static WEP keys For PSK type an ASCII passphrase or hex PSK Configure any other settings that are supplied by the network administrator for the SSID to which you will associate e Make certain that you tap on Commit following each change Once you ve completed the configuration WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 29 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Checking the Scanner Tap the Main tab Tap on t
265. n a sealed housing e Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material Wrap the connector securely with a waterproof electrical tape in an area out of the vehicle operators reach All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the powered cradle Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation The powered cradle is designed to allow the WORKABOUT PRO to be powered by a vehicle battery The battery installed in the hand held is also recharged by the vehicle battery This option accepts DC power sources ranging from 9 to 20V with optional pre regulator The vehicle cradle can be ordered with the powered cradle option installed Applying a voltage greater than that specified or reversing or reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to the cradle power option and will void the product warranty Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle An optional 1 8 meter 6 foot extension power cable PN 13985 compatible with your powered vehicle cradle can be purchased through Psion Teklogix This optional cable should be wired to a filtered fused maximum 10A accessory supply on the vehicle The power cradle draws no more than 8A less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V Any additional wiring connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 10A The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle
266. n you choose Open or Shared Authentication see Authentication on page 18 for a description of Authen tication types This option allows you to choose Disable if you are not using encryption AES Advanced Encryption Standard and TKIP Temporal Key Integrity are availa ble for all other Authentication types Authentication WORKABOUT PRO supports a number of classes of Authentication Open Shared WPA WPA2 WPA2 PSK and WPA PSK Open authentication allows any wireless station to request authentication The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication manage ment frame that contains the identity of the sending station The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it recognizes the identity of the sending station Shared authentication assumes that each wireless station has received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802 11 wireless network commu nications channel WPA and WPA2 authentication modes use 802 1X with EAP authentication The encryption options for these authentication types include AES or TKIP WPA PSK Wi Fi Protected Access Preshared Key and WPA2 PSK authentications require a shared key to be configured on both the access point and the hand held compu ter One of the following encryption options can be chosen from the Encryption drop down menu AES or TKIP Network Key This text box is used to specify an A
267. nabled Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details EAN 8 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Convert To EAN 13 If this parameter is enabled an EAN 8 bar code is converted to EAN 13 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details UPCA Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A bar code scanning recognition Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Transmit Number System If this parameter is enabled the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data Convert To EAN 13 If this parameter is enabled a UPC A bar code is converted to EAN 13 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 47 Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPC E D 4 8 UPCE Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC E Enable UPC E1 Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E1 zero suppressed bar code scans Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Transmit Number System If this parameter is enabled the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data Convert To UPC A This parameter conver
268. nccccncnnnnnos 192 AC Wall Adaptor Model PS1050 G1 2 0 oe ccc cece eect cnet ee neeeenees 192 Automotive Adaptor Model WA3113 G2 1 2 0 0 ccc cece eee teen teen eeeneneeenes 193 Single Battery Charger Model WA3001 G1 0 ccc e cece eee e eect e eee e ene eees 194 6 17 1 Inserting A Battery in the Single Battery Charger 0 cece eee 194 6 17 2 Battery Charge Duration 0 0 ccc cece ec c cece eect n eect nr 194 6 17 3 Charge Indicators Single Battery Charge LED 00 cece cece 194 Quad Battery Charger Model WA3004 G1 0 cece cence cence ee eee ee ee enes 195 6 18 1 Charging Batteries A A cts 196 6 18 2 Battery Charge Duration 00 0 0 ccc cece eee cee ee eee eee rr 196 6 18 3 Charge Indicators The LEDs 0c cece cece eee ence eee rr 196 6 18 4 Troubleshooting 2 li cis 196 Quad Docking Station WA4204 G2 amp WA4304 G2 0 0 0 ccc cece cence eet eens 198 6 19 1 Quad Docking Station Setup 0 cece cece cence eee ee eee teen rs 198 6 19 2 Quad Indicators na bee eeee eee Pehecdee 199 6 19 3 Inserting a WORKABOUT PRO in the Quad Docking Station 199 0 19 4 Network Acces eo 199 6 19 5 Battery Charging LED Behaviour 00 ccc ee eee e eee e tence rr 200 6 19 6 Troubleshooting 00 cece cece ence eee eee rr rr 200 The Vehicle Cradle a AA senor as 200 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User
269. nd supports the authentication and en cryption elements required for 802 111 also known as Wi Fi Protected Access 2 WPA2 as well as predecessors such as WPA and WEP Summit software includes an integrated suppli cant that supports a broad range of security capabilities including e 802 1X authentication using pre shared keys or an EAP type required for WPA2 and WPA e Data encryption and decryption using WPA2 AES WPA TKIP or WEP Common EAP types include e LEAP Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points LEAP does not require the use of server or client certificates LEAP supports Windows Active Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to offline dictionary attacks C 4 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual C 3 2 C 3 3 Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU SCU EAP Types e EAP FAST Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to protect against offline dictionary attacks Like LEAP EAP FAST does not require the use of server or client certificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains e PEAP Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to encrypt EAP traf fic Two different inner methods are used with PEAP EAP MSCHAPV2 resulting in PEAP MSCHAP This is appropriate for use against Windows Active Directory and domains EAP GTC resulting in PEAP GTC This is for authentication with one time
270. ndows CE 5 0 User Manual 53 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Onscreen Indicators If a modifier key has been pressed but is not locked on it is displayed in the taskbar in low ercase characters for example blue key It will remain active only until the next key is pressed at which point the modifier key is turned off Note The locking function of the modifier keys can be set up so that pressing one of these keys once will lock the key on They can also be set up so that they must be pressed twice to be locked on Refer to Keyboard One Shots Mode on page 100 for details all Battery Gauge The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides a visual indication of the remain ing battery power The icon acts as a meter that is either full at three quarter level half quarter level or empty When the battery level is low approximately 15 minutes from empty a warning window pops up When the battery power is completely depleted a final warning window indicates that the WORKABOUT PRO will be powered down If the WORKABOUT PRO is using external AC power an AC icon is displayed in the taskbar al al of qa al gt Full 15 50 25 Empty AC Connection BF Battery Charge The battery charge icon is displayed in the taskbar when the hand held battery is being charged all 802 11 Radio Signal Quality Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer filled bars within this icon
271. netlog File size 500000 is stopped Start l Stop D DU5i gt 7 The Utilities tab is used to log network traffic When you tap on the Start button debug data is collected so that if necessary it can be forwarded to a Psion Teklogix technician for evaluation WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 133 Chapter 5 Configuration Error Reporting 5 10 Error Reporting Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts ad Error Reporting ok x Error e Report software errors to G Microsoft to help improve products Reporting E Display upload success E Display upload failure File system usage Q Les l a Larger sizes increase 256 KB the opportunity to 384 KB correct problems 512 KB 5 11 Internet Options Internet Options Internet Settings ok x General connection Advanced JE Start Page htt sionteklogix cor Search Page fhttp search msn com Cache Size in KB 512 Clear Cache Clear History a Seog ai gt The tabs available for Internet Options allows you to customise the way the Internet works on your WORKABOUT PRO General Tab Define your home page and search page e Connection Tab Set up view and change your dialup and local network connections 134 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 12 5 13 Chapter 5 Configuration
272. ng Symbology Predefined Presets The following presets select groups of similar bar codes for decoding AN Note It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible Factory Default This preset enables the decoding of frequently used bar codes My Default This preset is synchronized with the Teklogix Scanners applet and contains all the symbolo gles selected using the Teklogix Scanner applet For details on this synchronization see Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet on page E 14 All This preset enables the decoding of all bar codes that the imager can decode E 2 WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 2 3 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets Linear This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode Linear and PDF417 This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can decode Matrix This preset enables the decoding of all 2 D symbologies that the imager can decode Postal This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets The following presets enable successful bar code image capture in almost all conditions EN Note It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions It is optimized for
273. ng cables between the cradle and other devices review the following Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring e Protect cable runs from pinching overheating and physical damage Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal e Use plastic straps and tie downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired loca tion away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled e Keep cables away from heat sources grease battery acid and other potential hazards e Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle 6 23 Using the Vehicle Cradle If your WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a shoulder strap or cover these accessories need to be removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle There is no need to remove hand straps pistol grips or tethered devices from the unit Slide the WORKABOUT PRO into the cradle and press firmly downward until it locks into place On a vehicle it s a good idea to pull up on the WORKABOUT PRO to be certain that it is secure To remove the unit press firmly on the RELEASE button on the front face of the unit until it releases from it latch The hand held will be slightly raised so that it can be removed 6 24 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle Two latches in the cradle hold the WORKABOUT PRO firmly in place Although these latches are designed for robustness and endurance
274. ng using Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Java programming supporting JDK 1 2 2 or higher Standard Protocol APIs Windows sockets CE net Application Software e e e e e Internet Explorer 6 0 incl with Windows CE 5 0 Unique Psion Teklogix Voice Dialer and Contacts Manager incl Windows CE 5 0 PTX Connect VoIP Optional Open TekTerm terminal emulation software supports IBM 5250 IBM 3270 HP2392 ANSI and TESS Mobile Control Center MCC device management Expansion Slots e e One SD MMC memory card slot user accessible End cap USB Interface supports GPS expansion module WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 213 Chapter 7 Specifications WORKABOUT PRO Specifications e e 100 PIN expansion interface supports PCMCIA type ID GSM GPRS EDGE and other third party expansion modules developed using Psion Teklogix WORKABOUT PRO Hardware Developer s Kit Flex cable interface with robust connector supports scanner serial and imager USB modules One Type II CF Card Slot External Connectors e e e One Tether connection with full RS232 and USB 1 1 functionality One Low Insertion Force LIF docking connector DC Power Jack Power Management e e e e e e Optional 3 7V 3300 mAh High Capacity Battery Pack Optional 3 7V 4400 mAh Super High Capacity Battery Pack Advanced Smart Battery with gas gauge 3 power source options Runs off battery AC power or automotive
275. ngs ok x Advanced User Registry Editor Path HKLM HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT fH HKEY_CURRENT_USER e HKEY_USERS 1 0x00000001 RegPersisted a Dga Bi gt This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to the WORKABOUT PRO 168 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual PERIPHERAL DEVICES amp ACCESSORIES 6 6 1 Carrying Accessories 2 ee 173 6 2 Attaching the Hand Strap 2 ee 173 6 3 Attaching the Pistol Grip ee 175 6 4 The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip 176 6 5 Protective Carrying Case 2 ee 181 6 6 Soft Shell Holsters sore id oe ia ee ee eya 181 6 7 The Batteries eta bi li ds bee Aaa 0 eh Se ei 182 6 7 1 Secure Battery Cover aooaa ee 182 6 8 Adaptor Cable Options icme i o s acia p m A a a AO Ge N Aa e 185 6 9 Chargers and Docking Stations 2 ee 185 6 9 1 Installation Chargers and Docking Stations 185 6 9 2 Power Consumption Considerations 0004 186 6 9 3 Operator Controls 2 ee ee 186 6 9 4 Important Charger Safety Instructions 04 186 6 10 Desktop Docking Station 2 2 a 187 6 10 1 Charging a Battery Installed in the WORKABOUT PRO 1 1L 189 6 10 2 Charging a Spare Battery 2 2 ee 189 6 10 3 Battery Charge
276. nimum 40 Minimum 25 absolute absolute absolute dark light dark light reflect dark light reflect reflectance meas ance measured at ance measured at ured at 650 nm 650 nm 650 nm Dimensions 1 93 cm max H x 1 93 cm max H x 1 21 cmH x 2 16 3 84 cm max W 3 84 cm max W x cm W x 1 55 cm x 3 51 cmmax D 3 51 cm max D max 0 76 in max H x 0 76 in max H x 0 47 in H x 0 85 1 51 in max W x 1 51 in max W x in W x 0 61 in D 1 38 in max D 1 38 in max D max Symbologies UPC EAN Code UPC EAN Code UPC EAN Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 12 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar MSI UCC EAN 128 TriOptic Code 39 128 Code 39 Code 93 12 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar MSI UCC EAN 128 TriOptic Code 39 128 Code 39 Code 93 12 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar MSI Plessey WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 237 Chapter 7 Specifications SE1223HP LR and SE955HP Specifications 7 5 1 1 SE 1223HP Decode Zone 4 844 Lux to 86 112 Lux Minimum Range Width of Field Rel Width of Field Mil Size Inches Inches Inches Inches 5 2 15 1 25 7 3 7 5 2 25 1 11 4 10 1 75 0 5 15 15 6 UPC 2 1 22 9 15 2 1 25 10 20 2 1 30 12 5 40 3 75 56 23 55 5 66 25 7 5 1 2 SE 1223LR Decode Zone 4 844 Lux to 86 112 Lux de Width of Field dre Width of Field Mil Size Inches Inches Inches Inches 10 11 2 24 5 15 7 5 1 39 8 20 7 5 1 48 10 40 10 2 90 19 55 10 2
277. ning battery capac ity at which a warning message is displayed on the WORKABOUT PRO screen from 0 to 20 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 113 Chapter 5 Configuration Power Management Properties 5 5 9 9 Devices This tab controls power to individual CF and SDIO slots Enable or disable the checkboxes as needed then tap on Apply followed by OK to save your changes mima rE 5 5 5 6 Built In Devices Power Propertie OKE x Devices Built in Devices Wakeup _4 gt V Enable audio power savings WWAN power mode Enabled Keep on for 1 hour y e DM i m rE The Built In Devices tab allows you to enable provide power or disable terminate power to the device s installed in your unit Keep in mind that the content of this screen varies de pending on the devices installed Tapping on OK activates your selections 5 5 5 7 Wakeup This option allows you to define which key s can be pressed to wake the hand held from a suspend state 114 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Power Management Properties If the Two key wakeup option is checked the operator will need to press two keys FN BLUE ENTER to switch the hand held on 5 5 5 8 Suspend Mode Power Properties Wakeup Suspend Mode Power Propertie oki x Built in Devices Wakeup Suspen 4 gt Scan key waki Allow these scanner keys to p
278. nsional 2D Imagers 207 6 29 Bluetooth Peripherals cion eg doh hat ed de age ee a eS 208 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 171 6 1 A 6 2 Carrying Accessories Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices Accessories Carrying Accessories There are a variety of carrying accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably with the WORKABOUT PRO Important Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accessories These chemicals may damage the plastic casing Table 6 1 Carrying Accessory Model Number Hand Strap WA6025 for WORKABOUT PRO C WA6125 for WORKABOUT PRO S Pistol Grip WA6001 G1 Pistol Grip for SX5393 Imager WA6002 G1 Protective Carrying Case for WORKABOUT PRO C Model varies depending on the end cap installed on hand held WA6091 G2 with a belt clip works with scanners WA6094 G2 with GSM or 802 11b g end cap WA6095 G2 with 1D Scan or 1D Imager end cap WA6096 G2 with 2D scan or 1D imager end cap WA6097 G2 with universal end cap case s top open Protective Carrying Case for WORKABOUT PRO S Model varies depending on the type end cap installed on hand held WA6190 G2 with a belt clip works with scanners WA6194 G2 with GSM or b g end cap WA6195 G2 with 1D Scan or 1D Imager end cap WA6196 G2 with 2D scan or 1D imager end cap WA6197 G2 with universal end cap case s top open Soft Shell Holster WA6050
279. nsmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Reading Range This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned The default setting Extended allows for increased reading distance Check Digit Verification The available options for this parameter are Disabled MOD 10 Check and French CIP Check Digit Verification uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted D 52 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 4 15 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Matrix 2 of 5 Note French CIP French pharmaceutical is only used with bar codes containing 7 characters Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be ena
280. nual It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates The desktop docking station is designed to charge the battery installed in the WORK ABOUT PRO along with a spare battery pack It is equipped with two USB ports a Host USB port to connect peripherals such as a printer keyboard etc and a Client USB to connect the docking station to a PC 188 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Charging a Battery Installed in the WORKABOUT PRO Figure 6 4 Back Of Desktop Docking Station Spare Battery Charge Well Client USB Port Host USB Port DC IN Socket AN Important This docking station can only be used to charge Psion Teklogix approved Lithium Ion batteries 6 10 1 Charging a Battery Installed in the WORKABOUT PRO Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN socket on the desktop docking station Plug the pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet e Slide the hand held into the docking station making certain that the LIF Low Insertion Force port on base of the WORKABOUT is securely seated on the docking station connector pins An icon is displayed briefly in the navigation bar at the top of the hand held screen indicating that the unit is properly installed in the station d This icon is only displayed when the unit is switched on The LED on the WORKABOUT PRO lights up indicating that the unit has external power and batt
281. o virtual key 0 VK 0 Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key i ig ISS IM Note To add a shifted state SHIFT and or CTRL press TAB to position the cursor in m the checkbox next to SHIFT Pressed and or CTRL Pressed Press SPACE to select the shift state you want to assign Removing Unicode Values In the Unicode Mapping tab highlight the item you want to delete and choose the Remove button 5 5 3 7 Scancode Remapping A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key a function or a macro Scancode Remap ping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard A key can be remapped to send a virtual key e g VK_F represents the F key VK_RETURN represents the ENTER key etc perform a function e g turn the scanner on change volume con trast etc or run a macro There are three different tables of scancode mappings the Normal table the Blue table and the Orange table The Normal table defines unmodified key presses the Blue table defines 104 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties key presses that occur when the FN BLUE modifier is on the Orange table defines key presses that occur when the FN ORANGE modifier is on The default mappings of these scancodes
282. ode D 20 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 3 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 39 Prefix Exception1 2 And 3 This parameter works in conjunction with the AJM ID parameter When AIM ID is enabled an AIM ID prefix is added to every bar code The Prefix Exception parameter allows you to switch off AIM ID for up to three bar codes Double tapping on Prefix Exception 1 Prefix Exception 2 or Prefix Exception 3 displays a list of bar codes Prefix Exception 1 lok When a bar code in this list is highlighted an AJM ID prefix is not added to the selected bar code For a description of AZM ID refer to Add AIM ID Prefix on page D 43 Conversely if you only have two or three bar codes that require the AJM ID prefix you can disable AZM ID and highlight the bar codes to which you want an AJM ID prefix applied using the Prefix Exception parameters Code 39 Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables Code 39 Start Stop Transmit Setting this parameter to on enables the transmission of start and stop characters which are usually not transmitted Code 39 can start and end with either a or a character see also next parameter Accepted Start Char Check Char When this parameter is set to Validate only the integrity of a Code 39 symbol is checked to ensure that 1t complies with specified algorithms WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 21 Appendix D Bar Co
283. ode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 4 to 55 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 13 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Codabar D 2 13 Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar or off to disable it Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for Codabar can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a spec ified range from 5 to 55 CLSI Editing When enabled this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the first fifth and tenth character
284. on 0 1 mm 4 mils Reading Distance Up to 90cm 35 in Symbologies UPC E amp A EAN RSS Code 39 Code 128 UCC EAN 128 ISBN ISBT Interleaved Matrix Industrial and Standard 2 of 5 Codabar Code 93 931 Code 11 MSI Plessey Telepen PDF417 Micro PDF417 Ambient Light Works in any lighting conditions from 0 to 100 000 lux Shock 2000G 0 7ms half sinus 3 axes Vibration 50G r m s 242 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 7 5 3 1 7 5 4 Chapter 7 Specifications SX5400 Imager EV15 Imager Decode Zone 0 Lux to 100 000 Lux Minimum Range Maximum Range Mil Size Inches Inches 5 2 5 7 10 3 14 UPC 2 14 5 20 2 5 22 40 3 35 5 20 2 5 22 High quality symbols in normal room light SX5400 Imager Specification SX5400 Optical resolution 752H x 480V Field of view at 160mm 120mm H x 78mm V 41 1 H x 27 4 V Pitch angle 45 Skew angle 45 Ambient light 0 to 100 000 lux full sunlight 300 lux nominal Minimum contrast 10 Targeting Intuitive range finding 626 nm LED Self illumination Red LED standard Supply voltage 5V 10 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 243 Chapter 7 Specifications SX5400 Imager Power supply 3 6 Volt DC nominal 2 7 5 Volts DC Connectivity USB 1 1 or serial async 7 5 4 1 Connector to the interface Molex 52892 1295 or HiRose FH12 12S 5SH
285. on this must be configured manually Profiles In the following section all the parameters that need to be configured for a connection such as APN user name password DNS server addresses etc are referred to as a profile Every profile is identified by an arbitrary unique name The profile named Default is special in that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted The Default profile uses pa rameters from a built in database The home network the network that issued the SIM is used for the database look up While there can be many configured profiles only one profile can be active at any time If connection profiles are configured manually the Enable automatic configuration check box should normally be unchecked In one particular use case manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic configuration If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device each SIM card being from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set up profile auto matic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured profile for each SIM card For this to work each profile must be configured while the corre sponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized 1 e the status is at least SIM is ready The Select profile drop down list in the data configuration profile selects to which profile a subsequent action applies A profile named Default is always present
286. on when the scan button or trigger is pressed Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 1 and 10 seconds Advanced Options Decoded HHP Continuous Scan Mode Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off once the scanner trigger or button is released This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly triggers on off Low Power Timeout To extend laser life you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a successful decode The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned a successful decode restores normal blinking When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec 1 min 2 min or 3 min Note This parameter is only used if the Tri rigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the WORKABOUT PRO is mounted in a fixed position otherwise Low Power Timeout is not used Add AIM ID Prefix The AIM ID Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility is an international bar code identifier When this parameter is enabled the AJM JD is inserted at the beginning of the decoded bar c
287. onnect Audio establishes an audio connection to the Bluetooth headset e Disconnect Audio disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset Volume Control displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be adjusted 5 6 2 Device Tab Bluetooth Select device to start pairing Name Address WORKSBOUTPRO OO1B9EE8S4C4 TORPSG 011 001E374E4D96 ilj This tab discovers and displays Bluetooth devices 5 6 2 1 Discovering and Removing Devices Scan discovers Bluetooth devices in range of the WORKABOUT PRO and lists them in this tab Any existing devices previously discovered and listed will also be displayed Clear removes all Bluetooth devices listed except those with currently paired and connected services Note To limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device refer to Filtering By Class of Device COD on page 121 A A 120 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Device Tab 5 6 2 2 Filtering By Class of Device COD 5 6 2 3 Bluetooth Dubi This menu allows you to limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device If for ex ample you choose Computer from this menu only computers within range of the WORKABOUT PRO are listed in the Device tab Choosing All lists all detected devices Device Pop up Menu Bluetooth TORPSG 011 WORKABOUTPRO Refresh Name Delete Brasi
288. or 1 hour Test 3 minutes Max allowed for change between T1 and T2 Cycle 10 times No explosion no fire no vent and no leakage Vibration resistance BS2011 Part After standard charge tested under the following 2 1 conditions Random vibration 5Hz 500Hz ASD FDC IEC68 0 02g2 Hz in 3 axis for 15 mins After which carry 2 37 out a standard discharge charge discharge No parting joints cracks or damage to connectors No leakage or critical damage Impact shock resist ance 3 cycles of 50G 11ms 1 2 sine pulse acceleration applied in 6 directions 18 shocks total ESD protection Accordance with EN61000 4 8 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 7 3 3 Backup Battery 7 3 3 1 Electrical Specifications Chapter 7 Specifications Backup Battery Note The electrical specifications apply for ambient temperature TAMB of 0 to 45 C unless otherwise stated Item Description Specification Unit Remark 1 Protection Chipset S 8261 2 Rated Voltage 3 7V V Typical 3 Rated Charge Current 28 mA 4 Charge Voltage 4 2 0 05 V 5 Discharge Cut Off Voltage 2 5 V 6 Charge Method Constant voltage Current limited 7 Discharge Current 0 5C 20 C Typical to 60 C 8 Internal Resistance 225 mo Maximum WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 233 Chapter 7 Specifications Backup Battery 7 3 3 2 Battery Pack Electrical Specifications
289. or this parameter are Disabled and MOD 10 Check Check Digit Verification uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Set Length L1 Set Length L2 And Set Length L3 Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Length Mode You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1 L2 L3 as Fixed Length Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Telepen Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Telepen D 54 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 4 18 Appendix D Bar Code Settings RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology Format This parameter allows you to set the bar code character format to either ASCII or Numeric Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including c
290. ose ports that can be changed each COM Port has a drop down menu Tap on COM in the Ports column to display a menu from which you can choose the COM Port you want to assign If you assign a conflicting port an asterisk is displayed to the left of device name indicat ing that this port has already been assigned WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 131 Chapter 5 Configuration Dr Debug A double dash in the Port column indicates that a COM port has not been assigned Tapping on the drop down menu allows you to assign a port 5 9 Dr Debug Dr Debug is an error diagnostic tool Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on Control Panel followed by the Dr Debug icon a Dr Debug 5 9 1 Status Dr Debug Status settings Utilities No error logs found O Dr Debug is on Dr Watson is on Browse logs E DDS This tab indicates the status on off of the tools Tapping on Browse logs displays error logs for your review 132 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 9 2 5 9 3 Chapter 5 Configuration Settings Settings Dr Debug Status Error Level Critical y Log Folder fiWindows System DrDebug DDUH I e Choose an Error Level from the drop down menu To change the location where debug information will be stored tap on the button to the right of the Log Folder option Utilities Dr Debug Status Settings Utilities File prefix
291. ouchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item use the Stylus Properties dialog box in the Control Panel to recalibrate the screen Inthe Control Panel choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window Select the Calibration tab and then choose the Recalibrate button Figure 3 4 Calibration Screen Stylus Properties OK E Double Tap Calibration a Tf your device isn t responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start the recalibration process tap Recalibrate aii a ma le e Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen WORKABOUT PRO Indicators The WORKABOUT PRO uses an LED Light Emitting Diode onscreen messages and audio tones to indicate the various conditions of the hand held the batteries the scans and so on LED A single two coloured LED is located on the upper right side of the keyboard just above the ENTER key When you press ENTER the LED flashes green to indicate that the unit WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 51 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Audio Indicators 3 6 2 has been powered up The LED table following outlines the behaviour of the LED while the unit is docked in a charger Keep in mind that the application running on the WORKABOUT PRO can dictate how the LED operates Revie
292. oup 3 class 1 Triple rate codec for HR FR and EFR Adaptive multi rate AMR Basic hands free operation Echo cancellation Noise reduction Hirose U FL R SMT 50 ohm antenna connector Molex 80 pin board to board connector Power supply Audio 2x analog 1x digital 2 x serial interface ITU T V 24 protocol USB 2 0 full speed SIM card interface 3 V 1 8 V 7 2 4 Model RA3040 G2 Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem Frequency band GSM GPRS EDGE GSM class Output power as per Release 99 UMTS HSDPA Triple band 850 1900 2100MHz Quad band 850 900 1800 1900MHz Small MS Class 4 33dBm 2dB for EGSM850 Class 4 33dBm 2dB for EGSM900 Class 1 30dBm 2dB for GSM1800 Class 1 30dBm 2dB for GSM1900 Class E2 27dBm 3dB for GSM 850 8 PSK Class E2 27dBm 3dB for GSM 900 8 PSK RoHS HSDPA features UMTS features GSM GPRS EGPRS features Class E2 26dBm 3 4dB for GSM 1800 8 PSK Class E2 26dBm 3 4dB for GSM 1900 8 PSK Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 2100 WCDMA FDD Bal Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 1900 WCDMA EDD Bdil Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 850 WCDMA FDD BdV All hardware components fully compliant with EU RoHS Directive 3GPP Release 5 DL 3 6 Mbps UL 384 kbps UE CAT 1 6 11 12 supported 3GPP Release 4 PS data rate 384 kbps DL 384 kbps UL CS data rate 64 kbps DL 64 kbps UL Data transfer GPRS Multislot Class 10 Full PBCCH sup
293. ously Quad Docking Station Model WA4204 G2 for WORKABOUT PRO C amp Model WA4304 G2 for WORKABOUT PRO S can charge the battery of up to four WORKABOUT PRO inserted in the docking station Single Battery Charger Model WA3001 G1 charges a single battery e Quad Battery Charger Model WA3004 G1 charges up to four spare High or Super High Capacity WORKABOUT PRO battery packs It can take up to 4 hours to charge a battery depending on how depleted it is The WORK ABOUT PRO intelligent charging system protects the battery from over charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity 44 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual i GIL SI A A 3 4 3 4 1 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Switching the Hand Held On and Off Note Refer to Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time on page 55 for addi tional information about the battery Important To avoid damaging the battery chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F Switching the Hand Held On and Off Important Refer to Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off on page 12 for details about safely installing batteries and switching the unit on and off The Keyboard This hand held computer is available in two models C and S The WORKABOUT PRO C model is available with an alphanumeric ke
294. oved a power off switch is automatically acti vated and the unit power is switched off if the battery cover is opened while the hand held is still powered on the unit may reboot Any active sessions may be lost Refer to Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On on page 12 Battery Swap Time Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been al tered battery swap time is approximately 5 minutes you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame To protect data the safest place to store data is on a SD MMC memory card or externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC You can also save data in the Flash Disk partition of the file system The Suspend Threshold adjustment in the Power Properties tab allows you to determine the level of battery power remaining at which the hand held will be shut down If left at the default value Maximum Operating Time the unit will run until the battery is completely empty the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time If you choose Maximum Backup Time the hand held shuts off with more power left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time Refer to Suspend Threshold on page 112 for details about reserving battery power for data backup purposes WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 43 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Charging the Battery 3 2 3 Charging
295. ower on the device Di DO Left side scan TD Right side scan EF Trigger handle Two key wakeup E Enable Z Mist a53 When this option is enabled any time the WORKABOUT PRO enters suspend mode e g following an idle timeout Go to standby on suspend forces the WORKABOUT PRO to enter Standby mode In Standby mode the display is turned off the keyboard is locked and the touchscreen is locked The processor remains on so that any running applications will continue while the hand held is in a Standby state In addition the radios continue to run making them instantly available when the unit is powered up again WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 115 Chapter 5 Configuration Stylus Properties 5 5 6 Stylus Properties _ Note Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit If your screen appears to E require recalibration contact your supervisor In the Control Panel choose the Stylus icon led ld 5 5 6 1 Double Tap Inthe Double Tap tab follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when you tap on the touchscreen Stylus Properties Double Tap caibration Touch Double tap this grid to set the double tap sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between taps Double tap this icon to test your double tap settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above
296. ows immediately after the character By checking the Store message in Outbox field a new message can be stored in the Outbox before being sent If no storage space is available or the modem does not support the storage of outgoing messages then this checkbox is disabled Inbox Tapping on the Inbox button opens the list of received messages Reading 50 messages for example from the SIM can take about 30 seconds By default the list of messages is sorted with the most recently received message first The list can be sorted by any other column by clicking on the corresponding column heading Clicking the same column heading twice re verses the sort order Pressing any letter or digit moves the highlight to the next message whose address begins with that letter or number WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 15 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN B 1 6 Note The date and time formats can be changed through the Region and Language menu in Control Panel For a new date or time format to take effect the Inbox has to be closed and re opened The Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire message can be read including the original formatting line breaks are replaced by spaces in the Inbox message list Pressing the Reply button opens the new message dialog as described above except the destination phone number is filled in already Outbox Tapping on the Outbox
297. p The tether can be adjusted to the opera tor s height The clips will break away in case of a severe force The Batteries Note Review Battery Specifications on page 221 in Chapter 7 for details The WORKABOUT PRO will operate with any of the following Lithium Ion battery packs e High Capacity Model WA3006 e Super High Capacity Model WA3010 In addition to the main battery the hand held is equipped with a replaceable rechargeable Lithium Ion backup battery Secure Battery Cover While the standard battery cover latches can be turned using your fingers or using the end of your stylus the optional Secure Battery Cover has special safety latches that can only be WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Secure Battery Cover locked and unlocked using a special tool Spanner 6 that fits into the dimples on the safety latches AA Spanner 6 Secure Battery Cover Latches in locked position Insert the spanner into an appropriate handle WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 183 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Secure Battery Cover 184 To unlock the secure battery cover turn the spanner until the dimples are aligned vertically To lock the secure battery cover fit the spanner into the latch dimples and turn the spanner until the dimples are aligned horizontally
298. p process In the Control Panel tap on the Power icon Tap on the Built in Devices tab and tap in the checkbox next to Enable Bluetooth Tap on OK When the radio is enabled a Bluetooth icon appears in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 117 Chapter 5 Configuration Paired Tab Inthe Control Panel choose the Bluetooth Device Properties icon to display the Bluetooth Manager Bluetooth The Bluetooth Manager allows users to search pair and connect to other Bluetooth devices within their personal area network 5 6 1 Paired Tab This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services The format of the name is lt Device Name gt lt Service Name gt Additional information may appear in this screen such as the Port Numbers for Serial Profiles service Bluetooth Paired Device Servers Mode About Select device to view options TORPSG D11 Serial lt COMO gt WORKABOUTPRO OBEX OPP iggib To learn how to scan for devices that will appear in this tab review Device Tab on page 120 Note lfa service is actively paired and connected the device and its services are displayed in bold typeface in this list 118 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Paired Tab Tap and hold down the stylus on an item in the Paired tab to display an associated pop up menu Select d
299. p window in which you can choose the appropriate Parity Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 7 1 5 2 used for asynchronous communication Trigger On Sequence And Trigger Off Sequence If a SICK scanner connected to the WORKABOUT PRO port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off the Trigger On Se quence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams Double tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of 10 elements f fo fo foo foo foo fro foo These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned For example supposed you launch Manage Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the module to trigger Next you assign a trigger key for this example period To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the trigger key enter a hex value in the Trigger On Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields When you press the trigger key the Trigger On Sequence is sent and when you release the trigger key the Trigger Off Sequence is sent turning the trigger key on and off WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 155 Chapter 5 Configuration Ports Tab 5 16 5 2 Port Replicator Ports A B And C Scanner Settings ok x Barcodes
300. parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Suffix Char This character if non zero is added after a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the begin ning of the bar code before the prefix character is added Note For Code 39 bar codes the AIAG Strip is performed before the Strip Leading Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added Code 128 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 128 Enable GS1 128 GS1 US Previously UPC EAN and UCC these types of bar codes include group separators and start codes WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 9 Appendix D Bar Code Settings EAN 13 D 2 7 D 2 8 Enable ISBT 128 To successfully scan this variation Enable ISBT 128 must be set to on Decode Performance If this parameter is set to on one of three decode levels assigned to the Decode Perfor mance Level parameter can be selected Decode Perf Level This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or aggressiveness for Code 128 symbols Increasing the performance level reduces the
301. pass words OTPs against OTP databases such as SecurelD e EAP TLS Uses the same technology as a follow on to Secure Socket Layer SSL It provides strong security but relies on client certificates for user authentication Note PEAP and EAP TLS require the use of Windows facilities for the configuration of digital certificates SCU EAP Types The following EAP types are supported by the integrated supplicant and can be configured in SCU PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC LEAP and EAP FAST With each of these four types if authentication credentials are not stored in the profile you will be prompted to enter cre dentials the first time the radio attempts to associate to an access point that supports 802 1X EAP Consider the following when configuring one of the EAP types PEAP GTC SCU supports static login passwords only e LEAP Strong passwords are recommended EAP FAST SCU supports automatic not manual PAC provisioning EAP TLS will work with a RA2041 radio module when Windows Zero Config WZC rather than the SCU is used to configure the type With WZC the native Windows suppli cant is used instead of the SCU integrated supplicant EAP Credentials Keep the following in mind when defining security settings e Ifthe credentials specified in the profile are incorrect and that profile is used the authentication fails without an error message you will not be prompted to enter correct credentials Ifthe credentials are
302. peed decreases GTIN Compliant GTIN global trade item number processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14 character EAN UCC GTIN To use GTIN processing you must activate the EAN 128 symbology Important When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated it is not possible to read normal EAN 128 Codes Reading Range This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned The default setting Extended allows for increased reading distance Code 93 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93 Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 49 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Codabar D 4 11 Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar Start Stop Transmit Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters a b c d A B C D a b c d t n e DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 Thus when a set is chosen the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be one of those characters and the body of the message should not contain these characters Setting this parameter to Not Transmi
303. port Mobile Station Class B Coding Scheme 1 4 EGPRS Multislot Class 10 EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK Downlink coding schemes CS 1 4 MCS 1 9 Uplink coding schemes CS 1 4 MCS 1 9 Uplink coding schemes CS 1 4 MCS 1 9 BEP reporting SRB loopback and test mode B 8 bit 11 bit RACH PBCCH support phase 2 phase access procedures Link adaptation and IR 7 2 5 SMS Audio Bluetooth NACC extended UL TBF Mobile Station Class B CSD V 110 RLP non transparent 9 6 kbps Point to point MT and MO Text and PDU mode Audio speech codecs Embedded 920 kbps serial interface Bluetooth Version Chip Antenna Transmit Power Frequency Range RX Sensitivity BER lt 0 1 Data Rate 2 0 compliant features Adaptive Frequency Hopping for better co existence with 802 11 radio 2dBi peak 3dBm 0 5mW minimum 4dBm 2 5mW max 2 400 2 4835 GHz 80dBm max 732 2 kbps and 57 6 kbps asymmetric 433 9 kbps symmetric Chapter 7 Specifications Battery Specifications 7 3 Battery Specifications 7 3 1 High Capacity Model WA3006 7 3 1 1 Electrical Specifications Note The electrical specifications apply for ambient temperature TAMB of 0 to 40 C unless otherwise stated Item Description Specification Remark 1 Interface Chipset Maxim DS2762 2 Rated Voltage 3 7V Typical 3 Rated Capacity 3300mAh Typical
304. r the trigger module selected Note Itis possible to map the same source to different modules trigger consumers for example to both the Imager and Non Decoded Scanner If so both devices opera tions will occur simultaneously This is not recommended in most cases especially with devices such as Imagers or RFID Readers It is also possible to map different sources to the same module trigger consumer for example two different trigger keys can be mapped to the RFID File System 138 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Add and Edit Trigger Mapping Add Key Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo box To add a new source to this list tap on the Add Key button A dialog will pop up and allow you to select the key board key to use as a trigger source Trigger key Soft Scan ly Add Key New Trigger Key Press a key to use as a trigger source 8 4 53 4 Trigger Press Type You can enable either an Up Down or Double Click response to a trigger press Normally when a trigger keyboard key etc is pressed and released a trigger down event is sent to the owner that is the application receiving the trigger press information followed by a trigger up If Double Click is chosen in this menu when the trigger is pressed released and then pressed again a double click event will have occurred If a mapping with the type Up down has a
305. re PIN on resume The Security Configuration dialog box is accessed through the Tools menu The Security Configuration dialog box allows you to enable disable and change the PIN You will need the current PIN to make any of these changes The PIN must be enabled in order to be changed If the PIN is disabled the New PIN entry field is greyed out Note Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be dis abled A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned settings By de fault this checkbox is unchecked While this option remains unchecked any PIN entered on startup or through the Security Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to the modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted This stored PIN is then used without further user interaction whenever the modem requires a PIN such as resume after suspend or modem removal The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up B 10 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 1 4 3 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN If unauthorized access to the device is a concern the Require PIN on resume checkbox should be checked In this case the PIN is not stored whenever a PIN is required you will be prompted to enter an appropriate value Network
306. rie snc o0iha58 bo gcceeoce sheng ead scans ss ques oShdel ee ae e bab EEE ears B 1 Bali Taskbar Icons econ B 1 B 1 2 Establishing A Connection oooocooococoocccnrnrcrnrrnnnrrrnnrrrr rr B 2 B 1 3 Advanced Informati0N ooooooooccoococrnccnnrnrrrnnn rr rr rrr rr B 4 A A A O B 6 BES SMS Ment eee Eea a RARA aaa B 15 BLO O B 16 B2 Power Mode siccsiccscdscccsdevaase cnet te eneen ii EEEE EE ERRAR R Rad B 17 Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU Cal SUMA dt EK EES a C 1 AAA A C 1 ES Profile Tab A AA AAA AAA C 2 C 3 1 SCU Security Capabilities 0 0 cece cece cence eee e nee teen eeenes C 4 C32 SU EAP Types 25189902 IEE ETE ARARE eno C 5 3 3 EAP Credential cocos ae yess hiss iia C 5 C34 ThirdParty Contig eisini 6628288 r ermer eene oe REELE AA RAAE n fag C 6 CA Stats Tab tats eee a a eee R C 7 Cd Diag Tab nanna 22232228 BAGG 5 NEES EES ES be C 7 C 6 Global Settings Tab 1 0 0 0c ccc cee teen een e eee n eee rr rr C 8 Appendix D Bar Code Settings D Scanner Ment rra NARA OERE D 1 D 2 Decoded Internal Scanner oooooooccoccocoocrnnnonnnrrrn rr rr rr D 2 D 2 1 Options Decoded Internal Scanner 0 cece cece ete eee eee ee eees D 2 D 2 2 Advanced Options Decoded Internal 00 0 cece cece eee e ee eens D 3 D 2 3 Decoded Internal 2D Scanning Options 0 0 cece eee cere eee eees D 5 D 2 4 Data Options Decoded Internal Scanner 0 cece eee eee eeees D
307. rotection circuit board to operate charge continuously at 4 2V No explosion fire smoke or leakage and 4A for 8 hrs Reverse Charging After a standard discharge Protection circuit board to operate Test reverse charge continuously No explosion fire smoke or leakage at 4 2V and 4A for 8hrs 7 3 1 5 Safety License Item Licenses Standard 1 UL 1642 The lithium ion cell has been listed and pass the UL1642 stand ard by UL Lab 2 UL 2054 The battery pack is in the process to apply the UL 2054 battery standard 3 89 336 EEC The battery pack is in the process to apply the below standard EMC directive EN55022 LVD 72 23 EEC EN55024 EN61326 4 RoHS Direc The battery pack is in the process to apply the RoHS directive tive applicable report by SGS Lab WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 225 Chapter 7 Specifications High Capacity Model WA3006 7 3 1 6 Environmental Test Description Drop Storage at high temp Test Reference mechanical EN60068 2 2 Test Test Condition Result Drop sample battery on all faces from height of 1 2 meters onto concrete floor No explosion fire vent leakage and the open circuit voltage higher than 3 7V 60 C dry for 240 hours No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage at low temp EN60068 2 1 Test 20 C dry for 240 hours No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage at high temp and high humidity IEC68 2 3 Test
308. rrent 0 5C 20 C to 60 C Typical 9 Internal Resistance 150 mo Maximum 10 Charging Temperature 0 to 40 Typical WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 227 Chapter 7 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 Battery Pack Electrical Specifications Item Description Specification Minimum Typical Maximum 1 Over voltage detection voltage 4 325V 4 350V 4 375V 2 Charge enable 4 10V 4 15V 4 20V 3 Under voltage detection voltage 2 5V 2 6V 2 7V 4 Over current detection current 2 97A 3 17A 3 36A 5 Short circuit detection current 9 9A 13 33A 16 83A 6 Short circuit detection voltage 150mV 200mV 250mV 7 Over voltage delay time 0 8s Is 1 2s 8 Under voltage delay time 90ms 100ms 110ms 9 Over current delay time 5ms 10ms 20ms 10 Short circuit delay time 160us 200us 240us 11 Recovery charge current 0 5mA 1mA 2mA 228 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 7 3 2 2 Standard Discharge Chapter 7 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 Note Standard charge is defined as charging with constant voltage limit of 4 2V and con stant current limit of 0 94 the termination charge occurs when the current drops to 45mA Standard discharge is defined as discharging at a constant current of 350mA until the battery protection circuit switches the battery output off in over discharge mode Acceptance Test Specifications Description Condition Standar
309. ry use Inthe Control Panel choose the Power icon a cl g Power WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Power Management Properties 5 5 5 1 Battery Capacity Tab Inthe Power Properties dialog box open the Battery tab to view battery details External Charger State Full charge A complete Good 100 Remaining Power 3021 mAh Full Capacity 3021 mAh Voltage 41 Current Ooms Temperature 34 0 C Chemistry Li Ion EERTE 5 5 5 2 Suspend Tab Inthe Power Properties dialog box tap on the Suspend tab Power Pronertie oKl x Battery Suspend Suspend Threst_ gt Power Source Battery Power KA Y Battery Power J after 3 minutes y Power Source This drop down menu allows you to choose a power source AC Power or Battery Power so that you assign the suspend timeout for each WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 111 Chapter 5 Configuration Power Management Properties Suspend Timeout AN Important Psion Teklogix recommends setting the Suspend value to 10 minutes To further reduce power consumption carefully consider the duration of time that the display backlight is on see Display Backlight on page 95 When the WORKABOUT PRO is idle not receiving any user input a key touch a scan and so on or system activity serial data an activity initiated by an application and
310. s 5 16 3 1 This tab allows you to tailor the double click parameters and the display options associated with your scanner Scanner Settings OK x Barcodes Options Translations Ports Internal scanner Non configurable E Display H Data handling To change a setting press space or double click RRE FEN gt Double Click Parameters Click Time msec This parameter controls the maximum gap time in milliseconds for a double click If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time it is con sidered a double click The allowable range is 0 to 1000 A value of zero disables this feature A double click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data parameter When a value is not assigned for the Click Data double click ing the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep If a value is assigned for the Click Data parameter double clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initiating a scan Click Data For both integrated and external scanners this parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your hand held following a double click A dialog box ap 148 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 5 16 3 2 EQ Chapter 5 Configuration Options pe
311. s critical to the operation of the equipment AN Warning These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury equipment damage or data loss 1 3 WORKABOUT PRO Features A Important For all safety regulatory and warranty information refer to the WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000126 The WORKABOUT PRO is a ruggedized hand held personal computer running the Mi crosoft Windows CE 5 0 operating system It is intended for use in commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions All possible bar code input methodologies are supported by one of a variety of scanners available Optimiza tion for specific operational environments is supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories E amp L Note For complete hand held computer specifications refer to WORKABOUT PRO Specifications on page 211 Model Variants WORKABOUT PRO C Model 7527C G2 e WORKABOUT PRO S Model 75278 G2 4 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction WORKABOUT PRO Features Platform PXA270M 624 MHz 32 bit RISC CPU e 1024 MB Flash ROM 256 MB RAM Operating System e Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 Multi Media Chipset e NVIDIAGoForce 4000 Multi Media Processor Real Time Clock CPU independent RTC capable of maintaining the system date and time for at least 3 months w
312. s of a 14 character Codabar symbol nN Note Symbol length does not include start and stop characters D 2 14 NOTIS Editing When enabled this parameter strips the start and stop characters from decoded Codabar symbol Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MSI Plessey D 14 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual El D 2 15 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Interleaved 2 of 5 Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for MSI Plessey can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 6 to 55 Check Digits Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One or Two check digit s If this parameter is set to One
313. s with loose cables If you are unable to obtain suitable advice contact Psion Teklogix for assistance go to www psionteklogix com service and support htm Note also that for better protection the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access In addition for safety reasons only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle and securely tighten the hex and wing screws The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle is to use the four 8 32 threaded inserts on the rear of the unit Bolts must not extend more than 10mm 3 8 into the cradle To accommodate the service loop of the connector cable leave a 4 clearance at the bottom of the cradle Leave a 7 minimum clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy removal of the hand held Also remember to leave at least a 3 clearance at the sides of the cradle to allow activation of the release knobs Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle when selecting a mounting location WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 201 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Mounting Template 6 21 Mounting Template The vehicle cradle is shipped with detailed mounting instructions including a drill template 6 22 Wiring Guidelines Before installi
314. selected tap on the Imaging tab E 4 WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 3 2 E 3 3 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Selecting a Camera The following screen is displayed Figure E 1 Imaging Tab Default Motion Low light near View Add Remove Activate R Read W Write A Active This window lists all the presets both predefined and custom Presets are identified as follows e Predefined presets are marked as read only e Custom presets are marked as read and write One preset either predefined or custom is marked as active Selecting a Camera If your WORKABOUT PRO has more than one built in camera one camera must be se lected for configuration To select a camera Tap on the Camera Presets drop down menu to view the camera options e Choose a camera specifically Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right in Figure E 1 on page E 5 the active preset is Low light near To set an active preset e Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 5 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Viewing a Preset E 3 4 E 3 5 E 3 6 Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset Highlight a preset and tap on the View button The associated preset window is displayed Camera Presets ok Pre
315. sers at the MAC layer Available EAPs are listed in the drop down menu next to the EAP Type menu at the bottom of the Wireless Prop erties screen EAP Type Extensible Authentication Protocol This drop down menu lists the EAP types available on your system The items in this drop down menu will vary depending on your network setup Keep in mind also that some au thentication protocols require that you select a Certificate WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 19 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Assigning an IP Address If you need to select a certificate tap on the Properties button to display the Authentication Settings screen Authentication Settings User Certificate Issued to Issued by Select Tapping on the Select button allows you to choose a Certificate MN Note When the Verify Server Certificate box is checked WORKABOUT PRO will verify the certificate provided by the authentication server during the authentication pro cess This requires that an appropriate certificate be manually installed on the hand held for the verification For more details about certificates refer to Certificate Assignment on page 130 Saving Settings and Exiting e Once you have completed the configuration press ENTER or tap on OK The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a preferred net work The radio will search for the SSID and will compare the encryption and a
316. set Default E Image Corrections W Auto Exposure 6 Manual Exposure E Windowing Predefined settings are read only e Tapon the sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an ex isting custom preset To create a custom preset Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button A screen like the sample below is displayed Preset Name Cloning fram set Default Enter alphanumeric string o Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box Tap on OK to save your changes The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset To change a parameter value E 6 WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 3 7 e e Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Removing a Custom Preset Highlight the custom preset and tap on the Edit button Preset Custom preset H Image Corrections W Auto Exposure E Manual Exposure E Windowing To change a setting press space or double click Tap on the symbols to expand the lists
317. sh Mount Pistol Grip Warning The installation of this scanner imager end cap must be performed using the appropriate anti static devices If unavailable discharge static from your body by touching a grounded metallic object before opening any covers on the unit Due to electrical incompatibility the WA9300 kit cannot be used with the EVIS ID imagers bearing Psion Teklogix part numbers 1050732 and 1050733 Please choose the imagers with part numbers 1050732 001 and 1050733 001 instead The part number is located on the imager s label The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard This product may contain a laser scanner that emits less than 1 4 mW maximum radiant power at a wavelength of 650 nm This product complies with CRH 21 CFR 1040 Class II and IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 Class 2 laser product What s Included 1 Scanner Flex Assembly 176 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual A 2 3 4 5 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip Screws 6 Kapton Tape Back Plate Pistol Grip Kit 4 screws included Warning Back up any data in RAM before you begin data are erased when the inter nal power of the WORKABOUT PRO is turned off Installing the Back Plate e e e e If your unit is using AC power disconnect it Remove the stylus from the end cap Remove the battery pack Switch off
318. splays a list of available access points with their respective SSIDs Signal Strength RSSI value and Security Status Selecting an AP returns you to the profile page and populates a new profile with the information availa ble from the scan to simplify setting up a new profile e Radio Lists radio attributes These attributes can be individually chosen from this menu When an attribute is chosen an associated list of options is displayed where you can assign new settings or view existing settings Commit Saves all changes The following table describes the options in the Radio Attributes drop down menu Radio bs Attribute Description Value Default SSID Service set identifier SSID for Maximum of 32 characters None WLAN to which the radio connects Client Name Name assigned to radio amp Ik6n into Maximum of 16 characters None which it is installed Power Save Power save mode for radio CAM Constantly awake Fast Maximum Maximum power sav ings Fast Fast power save mode Tx Power Maximum transmit power Max Maximum defined for Max current regulatory domain Measured in mW 50 30 10 1 Bit Rate Used by radio when interacting Auto Rate automatically negoti Auto with WLAN access point ated with access point Rates in Mbps 1 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual C 3 Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU SCU Security Capabilities
319. stal China Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal China Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 2 to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Postal Japanese Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Japanese Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Postal Kix Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Kix Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details D 40 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings Postal Korean Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 40 Postal Korean Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Korean Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 2 to 48
320. stem Char system character transmitted with the data Country code and System Char both the country code 0 for USA and system character are transmitted with the or None no preamble is transmitted The lead in characters are considered part of the symbol Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details UPC E Enable UPC E Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E bar code scans Enable UPC E1 Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E1 zero suppressed bar code scans UPC E And UPC E1 Check Digit If you enable one or both of these parameters a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data UPC E And UPC E1 Preamble When you double tap on one of these parameters a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one of three options for lead in characters for UPC E and UPC E1 symbols transmit ted to the host device System Char system character transmitted with the data Country code and System Char both the country code 0 for USA and system character are WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 11 Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPC EAN Shared Settings D 2 11 transmitted with the data or None no preamble is transmitted The lead in characters are considered part of the symbol Conv UPC E To UPC A This parameter converts UPC E zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion data follows UPC A format and is af
321. sterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list Tap the Format button The Format dialog box appears Storage Properties Partition Size 40 4 MB Version a y Number of FATs 1 y Root Entries E 12 v O Cluster Size KB l 5 TFAT Quick Format His 4 O Choose your format options These options include e Version of file system FAT 16 for devices holding up to 4 GB or FAT 32 for devices containing up to 32 GB Number of FATs File Allocation Tables Number of entries allowed in the root directory WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 143 Chapter 5 Configuration Teklogix Imagers Settings 5 15 144 e Cluster size 5 KB to 64 KB Two additional checkboxes govern e Whether to use the transaction safe FAT file system TFAT This file system keeps multiple copies of the file allocation table changing one while maintaining another as a backup e Whether to perform a quick format Quick formatting removes all reference to data in the partition without erasing the actual partition The partition will be treated as empty and new data will overwrite it 6 Tap Start The partition is formatted Mounting a Partition 1 Choose the desired partition 2 Tap the Properties button The Partition Properties dialog box is displayed 3 Tap the Mount button The partition is mounted The asterisk appears next to its name in the partitions list The Partit
322. supply The black lead con nects to the negative supply this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 203 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Port Replicator the vehicle body The power cradle is fully isolated and can be used with both negative and positive chassis vehicles You may have the option of connecting power before or after the key switch It is prefera ble to wire the power cradle after the key switch that is it cannot be turned on without the key on However if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the switch Keep in mind that the WORKABOUT PRO will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its battery has sufficient charge If an unfused power source must be used a fuse assembly PN 19440 must be added to the extension power cable the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable Use only a 10A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly 6 27 The Port Replicator The port replicator Model WA4005 G1 is an optional accessory that allows tethered devices as well as mounted peripherals e g bar code printers or weigh scales to be attached to the vehicle cradle The replicator can be used with or without the cradle power option The functionality of the WORKABOUT PRO tether port is replicated in
323. t Settings gt Control Panel gt Teklogix Imagers icon Tap on the Barcoding tab Figure E 2 Bar Code Presets Imaging Camera Presets Default Low light Low power view Add Remove Activate Barcode Presets Factory Default All Edit Add Remove Activate R Read W Write 4 Active This window lists all the presets both predefined and the custom Presets are identified as follows e Predefined presets are marked as read only For a description review Predefined Pre sets on page E 2 Custom presets are marked as read and write One preset either predefined or custom is marked as active Note The top portion of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets The top port of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets Selecting a Camera If your WORKABOUT PRO has more than one built in camera one camera must be se lected for configuration To select a camera Tap on the Camera Presets drop down menu to view the camera options e Choose a camera specifically Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit E 8 WORKABOUT PRO With Windows CE 5 0 User Manual E 4 2 E 4 3 E 4 4 Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet Setting the Active Preset Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right in Figure E 2 on page page E 8 the active preset is Defaults To set an active preset Highlight the pr
324. t it display drop down menus save your selections and so on Dialog boxes contain one or more of the following elements Tab A tab separates different elements of a dialog box Press the TAB key until a tab in the dialog box is highlighted To display adjoining tabs press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key To display the information in the next tab from anywhere in the window press CTRL TAB Textbox A textbox requires that you type information Press the TAB key to highlight the textbox and then type the appropriate information Drop down This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows next to the drop down menu to indicate that additional options are available Press the TAB key to highlight the menu and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to cycle through the options WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 81 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 5 0 Using a Dialog Box 82 Checkbox This box allows you to select or deselect an option To select or deselect a check box press the TAB key to highlight the checkbox and press the SPACE key to select or deselect it Radio buttons These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options For example in the sample screen in Figure 4 4 on page 81 you can choose to Obtain an IP address via DHCP or Specify an IP address Press the TAB key to highlight a radio button option and then select a radio button by pressing the arrow keys to highlight the appropriat
325. t to the profiles you want SCU to consider when switching between networks only the selected networks will be scanned for Auto Profile selection Driver and SCU These fields display the version of the device driver and the SCU that are running on the WORKABOUT PRO About SCU This box provides information about the SCU installed in your unit C 3 Profile Tab The Profile tab allows you to define radio and security settings that are stored in the registry as part of the configuration profile The profile that you create and save is listed in the Active Profile drop down menu in the Main tab You can define up to 20 profiles Radio Attributes forf x Main Profile status Diags Global Edit i Profile Default ly SDC New Rename Delete Scan Radio Summit Client Utility Client Name Power Save f Tx Power hd Encryption EAP Type None v None WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes C 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix C Summit Client Utility SCU Profile Tab Edit Profile Used to choose the profile to be viewed or edited If ThirdPartyConfig is chosen after the WORKABOUT PRO goes through a power cycle WZC is used to configure the radio New Allows you to assign a profile name Rename Allows you to assign a profile name Delete Deletes the profile unless it is currently active Scan Opens a new window which di
326. ta on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 17 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Composite D 2 18 A D 2 19 D 2 20 Composite Important To successfully read this type of bar code the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled In addition Center Bar Code Only must be disabled A composite symbol includes multi row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scamners along with linear and rastering laser scanners The options available for this parameter represent multi level components of a composite symbol Enable CC C And Enable CC AB To activate these components set these parameters to on Enable TLC 39 This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code Setting this pa rameter to on enables this parameter PDF 417 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables PDF 417 two dimensional 2D coding Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Micro PDF 417 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables Micro PDF 417 bar code scanning Micro PDF 417 is a multi row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but lower data capacity than PDF 417 D 18 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 3 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Decoded HHP Code 128 Emula
327. tap on Execute to carry out the command on the highlighted phone number If you have two active calls on your hand held one On Hold and one Active you can set up a conference call between yourself and the other callers To set up a conference call Highlight the phone number that is currently On Hold and choose Retrieve Tap on Execute Both calls will be listed as Active in the Call Management list All calls are now conferenced so that you as well as your callers can speak to one another WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 35 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout File Menu Phonebook Management 2 11 36 ES Tools SMS Voice Phonebook Version yo Je _ 4 File Menu Phonebook Management Tapping on the File menu provides access to your Phonebook The Phonebook allows you to store frequently used phone numbers When no numbers have been added to your phonebook the only command available to you is New Entry Phonebook x Name Number gt New Entry y Execute 202149 25 5 To add a new phone number to your phonebook Choose New Entry in the drop down menu and tap on Execute e Type the name corresponding to the phone number you want to add Phonebook Entry Name j Number 7 Store in SIM Save New Entry y Execute e Press Tab and type the phone number you want to store Tap in the checkbox next to
328. ter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integ rity of the symbol data before transmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Plessy Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the Plessy data this parameter must be enabled Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Plessy Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the Plessy bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 51 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 11 D 4 13 D 4 14 Code 11 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 11 Check Digit Verification The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before tra
329. tery this option is ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialog box are used 5 5 2 2 Display Appearance Inthe Display Properties dialog box open the Appearance tab Item Desktop y S Mas gt A This dialog box allows you to customize the display colour scheme 5 5 3 Keyboard Properties This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the FN BLUE and ORANGE modifier keys This dialog box also allows you to define macro keys and Unicode characters In the Control Panel choose the Keyboard icon goveccecesosecesssocesesseg 5 5 3 1 Key Repeat WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 97 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Repeat tab Keyboard Properties Repeat Sequence Backlight One lt gt Repeat rate Slow Tap here and hold down a key to test A Repeat Delay The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats and sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time Repeat Rate The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters p
330. that is suitable for use in your country Slide the adaptor plug into the Universal AC power supply snapping it into place These two pieces coupled together are referred to as an AC wall adaptor Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN socket at the base of WORKABOUT PRO located between the tether and LIF ports e Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Automotive Adaptor Model WA3113 G2 6 16 Automotive Adaptor Model WA3113 G2 A Important It is critical that you review the safety instructions outlined in the quick start guide enclosed with your automotive adaptor before using the accessory The automotive adaptor allows you to power your hand held and recharge your battery using power drawn from your vehicle s cigarette lighter outlet Figure 6 6 Automotive Adaptor Adaptor End Cap u DC Power Plug Automotive Adaptor Plug e Unscrew the adaptor end cap and remove the fuse inside the adaptor e Replace it with the fuse provided with your kit and screw the adaptor end cap back into position Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN socket at the base of the WORKABOUT PRO Insert the automotive adaptor plug into cigarette lighter outlet in your vehicle WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 193 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Single Battery Charger Model WA3001
331. the hand held voice option to place phone calls Taskbar Icons Wireless WAN icons in the taskbar indicate the status of your wide area network connection Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM GPRS radio is in stalled in the computer and the interface is enabled The letter in the signal strength icon G for GSM GPRS indicates that a packet data service is available and initialized Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is not available or if it is avail able but not yet initialized User interaction is required e g the user is required to enter a PIN A non recoverable fatal error has occurred The modem status is unknown or the modem is not connected to any network the signal strength is 0 The modem has found a network and the signal strength is between 1 and 20 The modem has found a network and the signal strength is between 21 and 40 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 1 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN G ill E B 1 2 B 2 The modem has found a network and the signal strength is between 41 and 60 The modem has found a network and the signal strength is between 61 and 80 The modem has found a network and the signal strength is between 81 and 100 A GPRS packet data connection is active the signal strength is between 41 and 60 and GSM GPRS packet service is availa
332. they will wear over time and will no longer lock the hand held securely in the cradle For replacement parts and instructions contact Psion Teklogix Partial disassembly is required 6 25 Powered Cradle Installation in High Voltage Vehicles Voltages exceeding 60VDC are considered hazardous For powered cradle installations on vehicles with batteries above this voltage ensure the powered cradle power connector is mounted in a dry location on the vehicle or that the connector is insulated with an appropri 202 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 6 26 6 26 1 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation ate waterproof material after installation The connector must also be installed out of the vehicle operator s reach Exposing an accessible power connector to water or other liquids could create a hazardous situation resulting in serious injury or death Installation of powered cradles in vehicles that operate above 60VDC require special consideration Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles it is necessary to ensure that the powered cradle power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator and does not get exposed to water or other liquids This can be accomplished in one of the fol lowing ways Ensure the power connector is installed in a dry location on the vehicle away from the vehicle operator s reach perhaps under a vehicle dash or i
333. tion When this parameter is enabled the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF 417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols If Code 128 Emulation is enabled the following Micro PDF 417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes C1 if the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 CO if the first codeword is 910 or 911 If Code 128 Emulation is set to off the Micro PDF 417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes L3 if the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 JES if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Decoded HHP Scanner Settings ok x Barcodes Options l Translations Ports Scanner ad E Options E Advanced Options Code 39 Trioptic Code disabled Code 128 E EAN 13 ESN 8 UPC A UPC E E UPC EAN Shared Settings To change a setting press space or double click Tap on the Scanner drop down menu and choose Decoded HHP WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 19 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Options Decoded HHP D 3 1 D 3 2 Options Decoded HHP Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain
334. tions provided with the program s setup wizard Refer to the following website for details http g0 microsoft com fwlink Linkld 147001 Look for the ActiveSync link Using Microsoft Vista If you have Windows Vista your WORKABOUT PRO data transfers do not require Active Sync To transfer data between your PC and your hand held Tap on Start gt Computer to display the drives Your WORKABOUT PRO will be visible here e Open drives files and folders as you would on your PC Voice Using the Phone Dialer If the WWAN modem is installed and enabled the Phone icon and the GSM signal strength icon will appear automatically on the taskbar e Double click on the Phone icon to access the phone dialer You can also follow the steps below to access the phone dialer e To access the dialer tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 31 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Dialing a Number Tap on the Wireless WAN icon and then tap on the Voice tab The Voice tab displays a phone dialer used to dial phone numbers The Voice menu provides commands which allow you to manage your phone contacts view your phone history and so on Phone Number Entry Field 1 2 3 0 Send Button Asx em Backspace Button r s gruv Quxxz J0 J Universal International 0 Dialing Prefix End Button Mute Button gt 255 9 2 9 1 Dialing a Number
335. to RS 232 serial interfaces by the port replicator It provides the user with 3 DB9 serial interfaces as well as one Type B USB port for connecting a Host device 6 28 Scanners and Imagers The WORKABOUT PRO supports a wide range of scanner imager options to address a variety of user application requirements Refer to Appendix D Bar Code Settings and Appendix E Teklogix Imagers Applet for details about configuring the unit installed in your hand held 204 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 6 28 1 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Scanning Techniques Scanner imagers available for your hand held include Scan Engine Kit Model Number 1D Laser SE955 WA9102 G1 WA9112 G1 WA9002 G1 1D Laser SE1223HP WA9000 G1 1D Laser SE1223LR WA9005 G1 1D Laser SE1524ER WA9009 1D Imager EV15 WA9103 G1 WA9113 G1 WA9003 G1 2D Imager HHP 5180 WA8010 G1 WA9212 G1 2D Imager SX5400 WA9008 It is critical that you review the safety information in the WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000126 before proceeding Scanning Techniques e Hold the scanner at an angle Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code In this position light can reflect back into the scanner s exit window and prevent a successful decode Scan the entire bar code If you are using a 1D or PDF laser scanner make certain that the
336. to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from to 55 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 7 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 39 Ela Check Digit Verification When this parameter is enabled set to on the integrity of a Code 39 symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms Note Only those Code 39 symbols that include a Mod 43 check digit are decoded when this parameter is enabled Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must to enabled Full ASCII If this parameter is enabled the characters and are used as escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character Decode Performance If this parameter is enabled one of three decode levels can be chosen in the Decode Perfor mance Level parameter Decode Perf Level This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or aggressiveness for Code 39 symbols Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code ori entation this is useful when scanning very long and or truncated bar codes Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security When you dou
337. ts UPC E zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A pro gramming selections e g Check Digit Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 4 9 UPC EAN Shared The setting assigned to the Addendum parameter associated with this option is shared across all UPC and EAN bar codes Addendum An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code This parameter provides two options Not Required but Transmitted if Read or Required and Transmitted e Double tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options Highlight an item and tap on OK When Addendum is set to Not Required but Transmitted if Read the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists appends it to the main bar code When the parameter is set to Required and Transmitted the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum D 48 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual A D 4 10 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 93 Addendum Add on 2 And Addendum Add on 5 Enabling these parameters sets the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or 5 characters Addendum Security If you tap on Addendum Security a dialog box is displayed in which you can define the security level of add on 2 or add on 5 with a value from 0 to 100 As security levels in crease the scanner decode s
338. ts mode 00 QWERTY 48 keyboard backlight 50 keyboard keys 45 ALT 47 arrow keys 46 BKSP 46 CTRL 47 DEL 46 ESC 47 macro keys 48 101 modifiers 45 navigating using the keyboard 65 one shots mode 00 SCAN 47 SHIFT 46 SPACE 46 TAB 47 Keyboard Properties 97 99 backlight 99 one shots mode 1 00 Key Index assigning 19 Key Repeat tab 97 keys alpha keys accessing 48 49 L Laser On Time D 2 D 20 D 42 LED functions 5 Length Mode D 50 D 53 D 54 Length Restriction bar code scanning D 8 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Index Field Size D 9 Maximum Size D 9 Minimum Size D 9 LIF Low Insert Force port pinout A Linear Predefined preset E 3 Linear and PDF Predefined preset E 3 Linear Decode D 3 Linear Security Level D 4 Linear Transmission only Decoded Composite D 56 Linear Transmission only TLC 39 D 56 linking hand held to PC 30 Low light Predefined preset E 3 Low light near Predefined preset E 4 Low power Predefined preset E 3 Low Power Timeout D 3 D 20 D 43 L1 Set Length D 7 L2 Set Length D 7 M Macro keys accessing 48 executing a macro 102 Macros menu accessing 0 recording and saving 101 maintenance of hand held 6 Manage Triggers 135 Matrix Predefined preset E 3 Matrix 2 of 5 30 D 53 Maximum Length 22 23 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 40 41 Maximum Size D 9 memory card creating partitions 141 formatting entire 140 formatting partition 143 m
339. tted strips the start and stop characters from this bar code CLSI Library System When enabled spaces are inserted after characters 1 5 10 in the 14 character label used in the USA by libraries using the CLSI system Check Digit Verification When enabled this parameter checks the integrity of a symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm either USS Uniform Symbology Specification or OPCC Optical Product Code Council Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Set Length L1 Set Length L2 And Set Length L3 Lengths for Codabar can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Length Mode You can choose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1 L2 L3 as Fixed Length D 50 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 4 12 Appendix D Bar Code Settings MSI Plessey Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MST Enable Plessy Set this parameter to on to enable Plessy Check Digit Verification The available options for this parame
340. umidity Cycle After standard charge carry out 5 cycles of the following 65 C and 90 humidity for 8 hrs 25 C and 65 humidity for 4 hrs 20 C for 8 hrs 25 C and 65 humid ity for 4 hrs Following that perform a fast dis charge standard charge and then a fast discharge Measure the time taken for the second discharge 100 minutes or more Dry heat EMC CE Testing After standard charge keep the battery at 60 C for 8 hrs Carry out a fast dis charge standard charge and then a fast discharge measured the time taken for the second discharge The battery will need to pass the requirements of the EMC directive 89 336 EEC and amendments when fitted into the product Emissions to EN55022 Class B 1998 Immunity to EN55024 1998 100 minutes or more Test to be performed by manufacturer Electro Static Discharge Test EN61000 4 8 A Contact Discharge 8kV for each contact pad by 10 times B Air Discharge 15kV for 10 times the discharge test point is for around battery casing No damage 224 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 7 3 1 4 Safety Data Chapter 7 Specifications High Capacity Model WA3006 Description Condition Test Condition Result Short Circuit Test After a standard charge Protection circuit board to operate short terminals and discharge No explosion fire smoke or leakage for 1 hr Over Charging Test After a standard charge P
341. unt button to dismount the memory card All partitions on the card will be dismounted 5 Tap on the Format button to format the memory card 140 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Creating Partitions All partitions and information on the card will be erased during the formatting process 5 14 2 Creating Partitions Once the card is formatted new partitions can be created in it The default is to create one partition that occupies the whole card but a card can be divided into more than one partition if desired Each partition appears as a separate folder in Windows Explorer Creating a New Partition 1 Tap the New button next to the Partitions list box The Create New Partition dialog box appears Create New Partition 2 OK a Name Sectors Sectors p Available MV Use All Available Disk Space 2 Type a name for the partition 3 Ifmore than one partition is desired uncheck the Use All Available Disk Space checkbox then specify the desired number of sectors to be used by the partition Note The sector size of the card is given on the left hand side of the Storage Properties dialog WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 141 Chapter 5 Configuration Partition Properties 4 Tap OK The new partition appears in the Partitions list Storage Properties OK x Storage Manager Store Info Josk2 SD Memory Car y Capacity 121 25 MB Unalloc
342. ure it is not damaged Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code Check that the bar code is within the proper range Does the hand held display the warning without scanning This suggests a hardware problem in the hand held Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code Once the scan beam has stopped check the scanner window for dirt or fogging Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners Turn the hand held on Wait until the unit has booted up completely Important If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period including off after which normal scanning begins Refer to Dot Time msec on page D 2 for details Double clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan Note that the aiming dot is standard on long range and high visibility internal scanners Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 6 28 4 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Operating Two Dimensional 2D Imagers Operating Two Dimensional 2D Imagers An imager takes a snap shot of a single bar code or multiple bar codes at one time It can find a bar code regardless of its orientation that is even a bar code print
343. ut from 0 to 2550 msec Add AIM ID Prefix The AJM ID Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility is an international bar code identifier When this parameter is enabled the AJM ID is inserted at the beginning of the decoded bar code Code 39 Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables Code 39 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual D 43 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 39 AA Full ASCII If this parameter is enabled the characters and are used as escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character Reading Range Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned The default setting Extended allows for increased reading distance Start Stop Transmit Setting this parameter to on enables the transmission of start and stop characters which are usually not transmitted Code 39 can start and end with either a or a character see also next parameter Accepted Start Char Accepted Start Char This parameter allows the user the option of using one of the two start stop characters or both char char and char Check Digit Verification Uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted The available options are Disabled MO
344. uthentication information you specified If there is a match between your computer settings and the access point settings the computer will communicate on the network through the access point 2 4 1 Assigning an IP Address If your network is not using a DHCP server you will need to assign an IP address 20 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Assigning an IP Address Ifrequired use the arrow buttons in the upper right corner of the screen to display the ZP Information tab IP Information wireless Statistics _ gt Address Type DHCP IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway Details Configure LA Note Choosing the Renew button forces the WORKABOUT PRO to renew or find a new a IP address This is useful if for example you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your unit is dropped from the network To define a static IP address Tap on the Configure button Motorola LA51xx CF Card ok x IP Address Name Servers An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer O Specify an IP address IP address ECT TE Subnet Mask ECT TO Default Gateway Mom i ED WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 21 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Name Servers Tab Tap on the radio button next to Specify an IP address Motorola LA51xx CF Card ok x IP Address N
345. vert To Code 32 D 7 Convert To EAN 13 D 6 Data Handling code page 130 Decoded internal D 2 Decoded Intermec ISCP D 42 Decode Perf Level D 8 D 10 Decode Performance D 8 D 10 Delete Char Set ECIs D 6 Discrete 2 of 5 D 16 Dot Time D 2 double click 1 48 EAN 8 Zero Extend D 0 ECI Decoder D 6 Enable Bookland D 2 Enable CC AB D 8 D 56 Enable CC C D 8 D 56 Enable RSS Expanded D 7 Enable RSS Limited D 7 Enable RSS 14 D 17 Enable TLC 39 D 18 34 Full ASCII D 8 22 Good Scan Beep 49 Laser On Time D 2 D 20 D 42 Linear Decode D 3 Linear Transmission only Decoded Composite D 56 Linear Transmission only TLC 39 D 56 Micro PDF 417 D 18 NOTIS Editing D 4 Options tab 148 PDF 417 D 8 Ports tab 153 Prefix D 6 RSS Code D 17 safety instructions 204 Scan Data Format D 6 Scan Indicator 749 Scan Log File 749 Scanner menu 146 scanner settings 146 Scan Result 749 Scan Result Time 49 Security Level D 3 Security Level TLC 39 D 57 Set Length L1 D 7 Set Length L2 D 7 specifications 236 Suffix D 6 Supp Redundancy D 2 Supplementals D 72 target aiming dot duration D 2 TLC 39 D 56 Translations tab 150 Transmit Check Digit D 8 Transmit Check Digit 12 of 5 D 6 Transmit Check Digit MSI Plessey D 15 Transmit Code 1D Char D 5 Trioptic Code 39 22 Trioptic Code 39 Enable D 6 UPC A Check Digit D 1 UPC A Preamble D UPC EAN D 2 UPC EAN Shared Settings 26 D 48 UPC E Check Digit D
346. vices tab Add a checkmark next to Enable Bluetooth To pair a device Follow the manufacturer s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode e Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area e When the scan is complete tap on the device to which you want to pair Inthe pop up Device menu tap on Pair WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 57 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO Pairing a Bluetooth Headset or Other Bluetooth Device An Authentication dialog box is displayed Authentication Enter a passcode to establish a secure connection To proceed without authentication press Next Passcode Cancel Next a Brasil e Ifthe remote device has authentication enabled type the PIN in this dialog box To proceed without authentication tap on Next Note If a remote device has authentication enabled and you ve skipped the authentication process a pop up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to the WORKABOUT PRO Tap on Yes and type the PIN When authentication is com plete tap on Done After entering the device PIN the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for that device Device Name TORPSG 011 Select service for pairing Serial Port OBEX OPP Refresh Done Ei Dubi e Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it e Click on Done 58
347. w the documentation provided with your application to determine LED behaviour If the unit is attached to an external power supply the hand held LED reflects the battery charge status LED Behaviour Charge Status Solid Green Charge complete Flashing Green Charge in progress Battery charged to less than 80 capacity Slow Flashing Green Battery charged to greater than 80 of capacity Solid Red Battery fault battery is not charging Fast Flashing Green Battery temperature condition Battery temperature is greater than 45 C the battery will not charge Older WORKABOUT PRO s using Keyboard micro and Power micro firmware earlier than version 2 3 603 indicate the battery temperature condition using a Flashing Red LED Audio Indicators The audio speaker provides a variety of sounds when a key is pressed a keyboard character is rejected scan input is accepted or rejected an operator s entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low To specify how you want your WORKABOUT PRO to respond under various conditions refer to Volume And Sound Properties on page 108 The volume keys are located above UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW The increase volume key is labelled with a ia symbol Y and the decrease volume key is labelled with a minus symbol 3 6 2 1 Adjusting WORKABOUT PRO Speaker Volume 52 e Lock the FN BLUE key on and then press UP ARROW the increase volum
348. while in the quad dock is a function of the user application software used to communicate with the host network Network Access The quad docking station has one 10 100 Ethernet port You can insert up to four hand held units The hand helds are connected to an internal USB hub The hand held unit automati cally detects insertion into a quad docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the USB Ethernet converters 6 19 4 1 Network Addressing Although the USB converters have fixed Ethernet MAC addresses there is generally no cor relation between these addresses and a specific hand held The host application uses standard TCP IP protocol to name locate and communicate with a specific WORKABOUT PRO on the network If a link is established between a WORKABOUT PRO and a host the application on the host and on the hand held must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the WORK ABOUT PRO is removed from the dock and the link is interrupted WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 199 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Battery Charging LED Behaviour 6 19 5 Battery Charging LED Behaviour The quad docking station supplies DC power to enable the WORKABOUT PRO internal fast charger Charge status is displayed on the hand held LED the LED turns red while the battery is being charged and turns green once the charge is complete If the battery is fully charged when the unit is inserted in the
349. work status or signal strength can be displayed Since all currently supported GSM modems are automatically detected the Enable auto matic port detection checkbox should always be checked If this checkbox is not checked a serial port can be selected manually This experimental feature allows the driver to be used with an internal GSM modem that was not recognized by the automatic detection or an ex ternal GSM modem connected to a serial port of the computer through USB or through WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN Bluetooth An external modem connected to a serial port must support 115 2kbit s 8bit no parity and hardware flow control B 1 4 5 Modem Information WWAN Modem Info OK Tre ENEE Manuf SIEMENS Model maS n Rev REVISION 03 010 o IMEI 855634003088124 IMSI 502370124928654 SIM ID 89302370107249286542 Phone 2 Home Microcell Fido The fields in this dialog box cannot be edited they only display information about the com puter modem If the network operator has not programmed a user phone number into his SIM the Phone field remains empty If the main menu shows an error status at least partial modem information may be available WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual B 13 Appendix B Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN B 1 4 6 User Interface Taskbar Security Data Configuration Driver Mode
350. xplorer 75 Remote Desktop Connection 75 Windows Explorer 75 protective case 8 punctuation marks accessing SHIFT Key 46 Index quad dock WA4204 G2 198 QWERTY keyboard alpha keys accessing 48 R radio adding new network connection 6 advanced settings of 23 Bluetooth 117 Bluetooth specs 220 Configure button 6 configuring 4 adding a new network connection 16 Ad Hoc 17 authentication network 18 Configure button 1 6 Connect button 16 EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 19 Infrastructure 17 Key Index 79 Key Index assigning 19 network authentication 18 Network Key 18 Network Key assigning 18 wireless information 15 16 wireless properties 17 802 1X authentication 19 Connect button 16 GSM SPRS EDGE 2 7 IP address assigning 20 IP address Summit assigning 24 name servers 22 name servers Summit 26 preferred networks arranging 23 RA2041 radio specifications 2 6 RA2043 radio specifications 2 6 RA3030 G2 GSM radio specifications 217 RA3040 G2 UMTS Modem radio specifications 2 8 specifications 21 6 UMTS modem Siemens HC25 2 8 802 1 1a g b Direct Sequence SS 2 6 802 11b g Direct Sequence SS 2 6 802 11signal quality 54 radio specifications 216 quad battery charger 195 Raster Expand Rate 2D D 5 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Vil Index Raster Height 2D D 5 RA2041 radio specifications 2 6 RA2043 radio specifications 2 6 RA3030 G2 GSM radio specifications 2 7 RA3040 G2 HC25 U
351. y protection circuit switches the battery output off in over discharge mode Acceptance Test Specifications Description Condition Test Result Open circuit voltage After standard charge measure within 24 hours 4 15V or more Internal Resistance After standard charge measure within 24 hours 200 mo max Capacity 1 After standard charge measure time taken for a fast discharge 110 minutes or more Charge Discharge Cycle After repeating standard charge and fast discharge measure the fast dis charge time after 300 discharge cycles 90 minutes or more Capacity 2 After standard charge measure the time taken for a standard discharge 500 minutes or more Over Discharge After standard charge apply a standard discharge followed by a standby dis charge Then measure capacity after carrying out standard charge and then a fast discharge 110 minutes or more Self discharge After a standard charge keep battery at 25 C for 30 days Measure the time taken for a fast discharge 100 mins or more WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 223 Chapter 7 Specifications High Capacity Model WA3006 Description Temperature Condition Perform a standard charge and fast discharge at 0 C 25 C and 40 C and measured the time taken for a fast discharge at 25 C Test Result 100 mins 0 C 110 mins 23 C 105 mins 40 C Temp H
352. yboard the WORKABOUT PRO S model is available with either a QWERTY or numeric keyboard Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard the differences are noted The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a Power button that allows you to switch the unit on and to shut down the unit to Suspend or Standby mode For details about the Power button refer to Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off on page 12 The FN BLUE and FN ORANGE modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions These functions are colour coded in orange and blue print above the key board keys Modifier Keys The SHIFT CTRL ALT FN BLUE and FN ORANGE keys are modifier keys Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed For example on a WORKABOUT PRO C a square bracket is printed in orange print above the G key Pressing the FN ORANGE key followed by the G key displays a square bracket rather than the letter G The SHIFT CTRL and ALT keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded two keys held down simultaneously The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual 45 Chapter 3 Get To Know Your WORKABOUT PRO The Keys 3 4 1 1 Activating Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed once
353. zed single station dock Although it provides quick in sertion and removal the cradle holds the WORKABOUT PRO securely even when operated in high vibration environments 200 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows CE 5 0 User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations RN Note Shock and vibration specifications for the WORKABOUT PRO are verified using 6 20 1 Psion Teklogix approved RAM mounts and mounting hardware Use of non certified Psion Teklogix mounting hardware is not recommended and may void warranty coverage The model number for vehicle cradles varies depending on the type of hand held WORKABOUT PRO C Model WA1210 G2 WORKABOUT PRO S Model WA1310 G2 A port replicator option is available for powered vehicle cradles Refer to The Port Replica tor on page 204 for details Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention An improperly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following operator injury operator visibility obstruction operator distraction and or poor ease of egress for the operator Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek pro fessional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration especially for sepa rately tethered scanners and other device

WORKABOUT PRO3 Hand-Held Computer with

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents